Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 644

GSM BSS

GBSS16.0

Handover Feature Parameter


Description

Issue 01
Date 2014-04-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2016. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description Contents

Contents

1 About This Document.................................................................................................................. 1


1.1 Scope.............................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Intended Audience.......................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Change History............................................................................................................................................................... 1

2 Overview......................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.2 NEs Supporting the Feature..........................................................................................................................................11

3 Technical Description.................................................................................................................12
3.1 Measurement Report Processing.................................................................................................................................. 12
3.2 Handover Preprocessing............................................................................................................................................... 14
3.3 Forced Handover.......................................................................................................................................................... 17
3.4 Handover Decision Based on Handover Algorithm I...................................................................................................20
3.4.1 Quick Handover.........................................................................................................................................................21
3.4.2 TA Handover............................................................................................................................................................. 23
3.4.3 BQ Handover............................................................................................................................................................. 24
3.4.4 Rapid Level Drop Handover......................................................................................................................................25
3.4.5 Interference Handover............................................................................................................................................... 26
3.4.6 Handover Due to No Downlink Measurement Report.............................................................................................. 29
3.4.7 Enhanced Dual-Band Network Handover................................................................................................................. 30
3.4.8 Load Handover.......................................................................................................................................................... 33
3.4.9 Enhanced Load Handover......................................................................................................................................... 37
3.4.10 Edge Handover........................................................................................................................................................ 38
3.4.11 Fast-Moving Micro Cell Handover..........................................................................................................................40
3.4.12 Inter-Layer Handover.............................................................................................................................................. 42
3.4.13 PBGT Handover...................................................................................................................................................... 44
3.4.14 AMR Handover....................................................................................................................................................... 45
3.4.15 SDCCH Handover................................................................................................................................................... 47
3.4.16 Other Handovers......................................................................................................................................................47
3.5 Handover Decision Based on Handover Algorithm II................................................................................................. 48
3.5.1 Quick Handover.........................................................................................................................................................50
3.5.2 TA Handover............................................................................................................................................................. 52
3.5.3 BQ Handover............................................................................................................................................................. 53

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description Contents

3.5.4 Interference Handover............................................................................................................................................... 54


3.5.5 Handover Due to No Downlink Measurement Report.............................................................................................. 55
3.5.6 Enhanced Dual-Band Network Handover................................................................................................................. 56
3.5.7 Load Handover.......................................................................................................................................................... 59
3.5.8 Edge Handover.......................................................................................................................................................... 59
3.5.9 Fast-Moving Micro Cell Handover........................................................................................................................... 61
3.5.10 Better-Cell Handover...............................................................................................................................................63
3.5.11 SDCCH Handover................................................................................................................................................... 65
3.5.12 Other Handovers......................................................................................................................................................65

4 Related Features...........................................................................................................................66
4.1 GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover.......................................................................................................................... 67
4.2 GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover......................................................................................................................... 67
4.3 GBFD-110607 Direct Retry..........................................................................................................................................68
4.4 GBFD-110608 SDCCH Handover............................................................................................................................... 68
4.5 GBFD-110801 Processing of Measurement Report..................................................................................................... 69
4.6 GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of Measurement Report...............................................................................................69
4.7 GBFD-510102 Fast Move Handover........................................................................................................................... 69
4.8 GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover........................................................................................................................... 70
4.9 GBFD-117101 BTS power lift for handover................................................................................................................70
4.10 GBFD-115504 AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment.................................................................................................. 71

5 Network Impact........................................................................................................................... 72
5.1 HUAWEI I Handover and HUAWEI II Handover....................................................................................................... 72
5.2 Direct Retry.................................................................................................................................................................. 72
5.3 SDCCH Handover........................................................................................................................................................ 72
5.4 Processing of Measurement Report.............................................................................................................................. 73
5.5 Pre-processing of Measurement Report....................................................................................................................... 73
5.6 Fast Move Handover.................................................................................................................................................... 73
5.7 Chain Cell Handover.................................................................................................................................................... 73
5.8 BTS power lift for handover.........................................................................................................................................74
5.9 AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment............................................................................................................................. 74

6 Engineering Guidelines............................................................................................................. 75
6.1 When to Use Handover.................................................................................................................................................75
6.1.1 HUAWEI I Handover................................................................................................................................................ 75
6.1.2 HUAWEI II Handover............................................................................................................................................... 75
6.1.3 Direct Retry............................................................................................................................................................... 75
6.1.4 SDCCH Handover..................................................................................................................................................... 75
6.1.5 Processing of Measurement Report........................................................................................................................... 75
6.1.6 Pre-processing of Measurement Report.................................................................................................................... 75
6.1.7 Fast Move Handover................................................................................................................................................. 76
6.1.8 Chain Cell Handover................................................................................................................................................. 76
6.1.9 BTS power lift for handover......................................................................................................................................76

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description Contents

6.1.10 AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment........................................................................................................................ 76


6.2 Required Information................................................................................................................................................... 76
6.2.1 HUAWEI I Handover................................................................................................................................................ 76
6.2.2 HUAWEI II Handover............................................................................................................................................... 76
6.2.3 Direct Retry............................................................................................................................................................... 76
6.2.4 SDCCH Handover..................................................................................................................................................... 76
6.2.5 Processing of Measurement Report........................................................................................................................... 76
6.2.6 Pre-processing of Measurement Report.................................................................................................................... 77
6.2.7 Fast Move Handover................................................................................................................................................. 77
6.2.8 Chain Cell Handover................................................................................................................................................. 77
6.2.9 BTS power lift for handover......................................................................................................................................77
6.2.10 AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment........................................................................................................................ 77
6.3 Network Planning......................................................................................................................................................... 77
6.4 Deploying HUAWEI I Handover................................................................................................................................. 77
6.4.1 Deployment Requirements........................................................................................................................................ 77
6.4.2 Precautions.................................................................................................................................................................78
6.4.3 Activation.................................................................................................................................................................. 78
6.4.4 Activation Observation............................................................................................................................................ 117
6.4.5 Deactivation............................................................................................................................................................. 118
6.5 Deploying HUAWEI II Handover and AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment............................................................. 118
6.5.1 Deployment Requirements...................................................................................................................................... 118
6.5.2 Precautions...............................................................................................................................................................119
6.5.3 Activation.................................................................................................................................................................119
6.5.4 Activation Observation............................................................................................................................................155
6.5.5 Deactivation.............................................................................................................................................................156
6.6 Deploying Direct Retry.............................................................................................................................................. 157
6.6.1 Deployment Requirements...................................................................................................................................... 157
6.6.2 Activation................................................................................................................................................................ 158
6.6.3 Activation Observation............................................................................................................................................161
6.6.4 Deactivation.............................................................................................................................................................161
6.7 Deploying Pre-processing of Measurement Report....................................................................................................162
6.7.1 Deployment Requirements...................................................................................................................................... 162
6.7.2 Activation................................................................................................................................................................ 163
6.7.3 Activation Observation............................................................................................................................................164
6.7.4 Deactivation.............................................................................................................................................................164
6.8 Deploying Fast Move Handover.................................................................................................................................165
6.8.1 Deployment Requirements...................................................................................................................................... 165
6.8.2 Activation................................................................................................................................................................ 166
6.8.3 Activation Observation............................................................................................................................................169
6.8.4 Deactivation.............................................................................................................................................................170
6.9 Deploying Chain Cell Handover................................................................................................................................ 171
6.9.1 Deployment Requirements...................................................................................................................................... 171

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description Contents

6.9.2 Activation................................................................................................................................................................ 171


6.9.3 Activation Observation............................................................................................................................................172
6.9.4 Deactivation.............................................................................................................................................................172
6.10 Deploying BTS power lift for handover...................................................................................................................173
6.10.1 Deployment Requirements.................................................................................................................................... 173
6.10.2 Activation.............................................................................................................................................................. 174
6.10.3 Activation Observation..........................................................................................................................................175
6.10.4 Deactivation...........................................................................................................................................................175

7 Parameters................................................................................................................................... 177
8 Counters...................................................................................................................................... 337
9 Glossary....................................................................................................................................... 637
10 Reference Documents............................................................................................................. 638

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 1 About This Document

1 About This Document

1.1 Scope
This document describes the Handover feature, including its technical principles, related
features, network impact, and engineering guidelines.
This document covers the following features:

l GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover


l GBFD-115504 AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment
l GBFD-110801 Processing of Measurement Report
l GBFD-510102 Fast Move Handover
l GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover
l GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover
l GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of Measurement Report
l GBFD-117101 BTS power lift for handover
l GBFD-110607 Direct Retry
l GBFD-110608 SDCCH Handover

1.2 Intended Audience


This document is intended for personnel who:

l Need to understand the features described herein


l Work with Huawei products

1.3 Change History


This section provides information about the changes in different document versions.
There are two types of changes, which are defined as follows:

l Feature change

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 1 About This Document

Changes in features of a specific product version


l Editorial change
Changes in wording or addition of information that was not described in the earlier
version

01 (2014-04-30)
This issue includes the following changes.

Change Type Change Description Parameter Change

Feature change None None

Editorial change Added the definition of None


"non-AMR FR calls" in
3.4.5 Interference
Handover and 3.5.4
Interference Handover.
Added the description
of Quick PBGT Handover
Enabled in 6.4.3
Activation and 6.5.3
Activation.

Draft B (2014-02-28)
This issue includes the following changes.

Change Type Change Description Parameter Change

Feature change None None

Editorial change Added the description of None


HoCDCOverLodeHoEn(BS
C6900,BSC6910) in
Handover Decision Based
on Handover Algorithm II.

Draft A (2014-01-23)
Compared with Issue 01 (2013-05-06) of GBSS15.0, Draft A (2014-01-23) of GBSS15.1
includes the following changes.

Change Type Change Description Parameter Change

Feature change None None

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 1 About This Document

Change Type Change Description Parameter Change

Editorial change Added the Added the following


BqNCellAbsThresSw(BSC6 parameter:
900,BSC6910) parameter in BqNCellAbsThresSw(BSC6
BQ Handover. 900,BSC6910)

Deleted the description of in None


handover algorithm I, all
handover decisions are
made after handover
penalty, basic ranking, and
network characteristics
adjustment, for detail
see Handover
Preprocessing.

Added several configuration Added the following


parameters of measurement parameters:
report. SIGSTRFLTLEN(BSC690
0,BSC6910)
DATASTRFLTLEN(BSC69
00,BSC6910)
SIGQUAFLTLEN(BSC690
0,BSC6910)
DATAQUAFLTLEN(BSC6
900,BSC6910)
TAFLTLEN(BSC6900,BSC
6910)
TASIGSTRFLTLEN(BSC6
900,BSC6910)
NCELLFLTLEN(BSC6900
,BSC6910)
NSIGSTRFLTLEN(BSC69
00,BSC6910)
DATASTRFLTLEN(BSC69
00,BSC6910)
DATAQUAFLTLEN(BSC6
900,BSC6910)

Modified the thresholds of None


the interference handover
trigger conditions both in
algorithm I and algorithm II.

Added the activation None


observation of the intra-BSC
directed retry in 6.6.3
Activation Observation.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 2 Overview

2 Overview

2.1 Introduction
The GSM network comprises multiple cells with continuous coverage. The handover
technique is introduced into the GSM system to enable the users who are in motion to
continue with the current call without interruption, optimizing the network performance.
During a handover, the MS and BTS in service measure the conditions of uplink and
downlink radio links respectively, record the measurement results into measurement reports
(MRs), and then send the MRs to the BSC. The BSC determines whether to trigger a
handover based on the MRs and the actual conditions of the radio network.
Huawei handover algorithms (handover algorithm I and handover algorithm II) involve
measurement and MR reporting, MR processing, handover decision, and handover execution.

NOTE

Huawei handover algorithms apply to the handovers on TCHs as well as the handovers on SDCCHs.
You can determine the handover algorithm used in a cell by HOCTRLSWITCH(BSC6900,BSC6910).
Figure 2-1 shows the procedure for performing Huawei handover algorithms (including handover
algorithm I and handover algorithm II).

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 2 Overview

Figure 2-1 Procedure for performing Huawei handover algorithms

Handover Decision Based on Handover Algorithm I


Figure 2-2 shows the procedure of handover decision based on handover algorithm I.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 2 Overview

Figure 2-2 Procedure of handover decision based on handover algorithm I

In handover algorithm I, five types of handover decisions are defined:


l Quick handover (including quick PBGT handover and frequency offset handover). Good
and stable services can be provided when the voice quality deteriorates during the fast
movement of an MS. Quick handover is mainly applicable in the railway scenario.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 2 Overview

l Emergency handover. An emergency handover can ensure the call continuity when the
radio condition severely deteriorates. Theoretically, an emergency handover has a bigger
deviation than other handovers in terms of the selection of the target cell. In a normal
cell, frequent emergency handovers should be avoided.
l Enhanced dual-band network handover. In an enhanced dual-band network, the resources
in the overlaid (OL) DCS1800 cell and underlaid (UL) GSM900 cell can be shared
during the assignment and handover procedures. That is, the calls in the high-traffic
GSM900 cell can be handed over to the low-traffic DCS1800 cell to balance traffic.
l Load handover. Load handover enables the system load to be balanced among multiple
cells so that the system performance can be ensured.
l Normal handover. Normal handover ensures good services when an MS is moving.
Figure 2-3 shows the handovers provided in Figure 2-2 and their priorities in handover
algorithm I.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 2 Overview

Figure 2-3 Handover decisions based on handover algorithm I

Handover Decision Based on Handover Algorithm II


Figure 2-4 shows the procedure of handover decision based on handover algorithm II.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 2 Overview

Figure 2-4 Procedure of handover decision based on handover algorithm II

In handover algorithm II, three types of handover decisions are defined, as shown in Figure
2-5.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 2 Overview

Figure 2-5 Handover decisions based on handover algorithm II

Handover Execution
During the handover execution, when a candidate cell is fully loaded:
l If HoCDCOverLodeHoEn(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES, the BSC allows an MS to
be handed over to the candidate cell.
l If HoCDCOverLodeHoEn(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO, the BSC does not allow an
MS to be handed over to the candidate cell.
The BTS power lift for handover function determines whether the BTS of the serving cell
transmits signals at the maximum power during a handover. The BSC maximizes the transmit
power of the BTS before sending a handover command to the MS. The BSC maintains the
BTS power during the handover to ensure the success of the handover. (GBFD-117101 BTS
power lift for handover)

Synchronous Handover and Asynchronous Handover


The BSC supports both synchronous handovers and asynchronous handovers. Generally, the
BSC performs synchronous handovers for intra-BTS inter-cell or intra-cell handovers and
performs asynchronous handovers for inter-BTS handovers. However, the BSC also performs
asynchronous handovers for intra-BTS inter-cell handovers when the following conditions are
met:
l DIRMAGANSITEFLAG(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES. That is, a repeater is
configured for the source cell or target cell.
l FRAMEOFFSET(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to a value other than 0 or 255. That is,
frame offset is configured for the source cell or target cell.
l The source cell or target cell is a multi-site cell.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 2 Overview

2.2 NEs Supporting the Feature


Table 2-1 NEs supporting the feature
Feature BSC6900 BSC6910 BTS eGBTS

HUAWEI I √ √ √ √
Handover

Direct Retry √ √ √ √

SDCCH √ √ √ √
Handover

Processing of √ √ √ √
Measurement
Report

Pre-processing √ √ √ √
of Measurement
Report

AMR FR/HR √ √ √ √
Dynamic
Adjustment

Dynamic √ √ √ √
HR/FR
Adaptation

Fast Move √ √ √ √
Handover

Chain Cell √ √ √ √
Handover

HUAWEI II √ √ √ √
Handover

BTS power lift √ √ √ √


for handover

NOTE

√ indicates that the NE supports this feature. × indicates that the NE does not support this feature.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

3 Technical Description

3.1 Measurement Report Processing


This section describes the features GBFD-110801 Processing of Measurement Report and
GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of Measurement Report.

Measurement report processing involves measurement report interpolation and filtering.

NE Selection for Measurement Report Processing


The processing can be performed either on the BSC side or on the BTS side.

l If BTSMESRPTPREPROC(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to BSC_Preprocessing(BSC


preprocessing), the processing is performed on the BSC side.
l If BTSMESRPTPREPROC(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to BTS_Preprocessing(BTS
preprocessing), the processing is performed on the BTS side. By setting the parameters
PRIMMESPPT(BSC6900,BSC6910), BSMSPWRLEV(BSC6900,BSC6910), and
MRPREPROCFREQ(BSC6900,BSC6910), you can specify the contents of the MRs to
be provided and the period during which the MRs are provided. This decreases the
signaling traffic on the Abis interface and the traffic volume processed by the BSC.

Data Selection for Measurement Report


MRs can be classified into enhanced MRs and normal MRs. The parameter
MEASURETYPE(BSC6900,BSC6910) determines the type to be used.

In an MR, the TCH measurement of the serving cell is classified into FULL SET and SUB
SET.

Measurement Report Interpolation


The neighboring cell indexes are found on the basis of the BCCH ARFCNs and BSICs
provided by the MS. Then, the uplink and downlink measurement results are obtained from
the MRs.

l If MRs are issued continuously, they are directly added to the MR list.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

l If MRs are not issued continuously and the number of lost MRs is less than or equal to
the value of MRMISSCOUNT(BSC6900,BSC6910), the system performs operations as
follows:
– If MrIntrplOptSwitch(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No): For the serving cell,
handover algorithm I performs the linear interpolation for the MRs. The lowest
values are applied to the interpolation of MRs by handover algorithm II according
to the protocols; that is, level 0 (–110 dBm) and quality 7 are applied in the
interpolation. For a neighboring cell, handover algorithm I and handover algorithm
II use the lowest values stipulated in the protocols for the lost signal level; that is,
level 0 (–110 dBm) is used in the interpolation.
– If MrIntrplOptSwitch(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes): For the serving cell,
handover algorithm I and handover algorithm II perform the linear interpolation for
the MRs. For a neighboring cell, handover algorithm I and handover algorithm II
perform the linear interpolation for the MRs.
l If MRs are not issued continuously and the number of lost MRs is greater than the value
of MRMISSCOUNT(BSC6900,BSC6910), the previous MRs are discarded. When new
MRs are issued, calculation is done again.

Measurement Report Filtering


Filtering is performed on MRs obtained continuously from the MR list. Averaging is
performed on the following items:

l Uplink/downlink receive level


l Uplink/downlink receive quality
l Timing Advance (TA)
l Radio Quality Indication (RQI)
l BTS power
l Neighboring GSM cell level
l Common Pilot Channel (CPICH), received signal code power (RSCP), and Ec/No of
neighboring Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) cell

The averaging minimizes the effect on the result of handover decision due to sudden changes
in the measurement values.

Power control compensation needs to be performed for the downlink receive level of the
serving cell by the handover algorithm II. If you compare the receive level of the serving cell
after the power control with that of all BCCH TRXs of the neighboring cell, there is no
mapping between them. If the cells overlap severely, handovers are easily triggered, causing
ping-pong handovers. After the power control compensation is performed, the receive level of
the serving cell can reflect the coverage condition of the BCCH TRX of the serving cell. The
power control compensation of the serving cell is performed after the interpolation processing
and before the filtering processing. In general, the compensation of power control is
calculated as follows:

Power control compensation = Downlink receive level of the serving cell + 2 x current BTS
downlink transmit power control level indicated by the BS-POWER-LEVEL element
information (IE).

The number of consecutive MRs required for filtering is determined by the measurement
object and channel type. See Table 3-1 for details.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

Table 3-1 Parameters related to the number of MRs


Object Type Channel Type Parameter

Receive level of the serving SDCCH NSIGSTRFLTLEN(BSC69


cell 00,BSC6910)

TCH SSLENSD(BSC6900,BSC6
910)

Quality of the serving cell SDCCH QLENSI(BSC6900,BSC691


0)

TCH DATAQUAFLTLEN(BSC6
900,BSC6910)

TA of the serving cell TCH TAFLTLEN(BSC6900,BSC


6910)

SDCCH TASIGSTRFLTLEN(BSC6
900,BSC6910)

Receive level of the BCCH NCELLFLTLEN(BSC6900


neighboring cell ,BSC6910)

SDCCH NSIGSTRFLTLEN(BSC69
00,BSC6910)

Power of the BTS in the TCH DATASTRFLTLEN(BSC69


serving cell 00,BSC6910)

RQI TCH QLENSD(BSC6900,BSC69


10)

If consecutive MRs are insufficient, the filtering fails. The handover decision is not
performed.

3.2 Handover Preprocessing


Handover Penalty
According to the neighboring cell information in an MR and the parameters, the system
performs handover preprocessing and adjusts the priorities of neighboring cells.
The handover penalty is performed after successful fast-moving micro cell handover, timing
advance (TA) handover, Bad Quality (BQ) handover, fast-moving micro cell handover, OL
subcell to UL subcell handover within an enhanced concentric cell, and after the handover
failures.
In handover algorithm II, in addition to the situations mentioned above, the handover penalty
is also performed after successful or failed load handover and interference handover.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

NOTE

l In the handover decision procedure of handover algorithm II, the handover penalty is performed
after the network characteristics adjustment and before the emergency handover decision.
l Handover penalty inheritance enables an MS to inherit its penalty state after the MS is successfully
handed over to another cell.
l After a quick handover, TA handover, BQ handover, or load handover (in handover
algorithm II) is successfully performed, the penalty level is subtracted from the actual
receive level of the original cell during the penalty period. Table 3-2 lists the parameters
related to handover penalty.

Table 3-2 Parameters related to handover penalty


Handover Parameter

Quick handover TIMEPUNISH(BSC6900,BSC6910)


HOPUNISHVALUE(BSC6900,BSC691
0)
QuickHoPunishSw(BSC6900,BSC6910)

TA Handover SSTAPUNISH(BSC6900,BSC6910)
TIMETAPUNISH(BSC6900,BSC6910)

BQ Handover SSBQPUNISH(BSC6900,BSC6910)
TIMEBQPUNISH(BSC6900,BSC6910)

Load handover (handover algorithm II) LOADHOPENTIME(BSC6900,BSC691


0)
LOADHOPENVALUE(BSC6900,BSC69
10)
LoadHoPunishInheritS-
witch(BSC6900,BSC6910)

l After a fast-moving micro cell handover is successfully performed, penalty is performed


on all the neighboring cells of the micro cell. Related parameters are
SPEEDPUNISH(BSC6900,BSC6910) andSPEEDPUNISHT(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l If an MS fails to initiate an intra-cell adaptive multirate (AMR) TCHF to TCHH
handover, it cannot initiate another intra-cell AMR TCHF to TCHH handover within
TIMEAMRFHPUNISH(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l In handover algorithm II, after the interference handover is initiated, initiating this
handover again is not allowed within INTERFEREHOPENTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910)
regardless of whether the handover is successful or not.
l After an OL subcell to UL subcell handover within an enhanced concentric cell is
successful, the handover from UL subcell to OL subcell is not allowed within
UTOOHOPENTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l After an OL cell to UL cell handover in the enhanced dual-band network is successful,
the handover from UL cell to OL cell is not allowed within
HOPENALTYTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l After a handover fails, different penalties are performed on the target cell based on the
causes:

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

– If a handover to a neighboring GSM or UMTS cell fails, the actual receive level of
the target cell is subtracted by FAILSIGSTRPUNISH(BSC6900,BSC6910) for
neighboring cell ranking during the penalty.
NOTE

Based on the handover failure cause, the penalty time could be


UMPENALTYTIMER(BSC6900,BSC6910), RSCPENALTYTIMER(BSC6900,BSC6910), or
PENALTYTIMER(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l If an OL subcell to UL subcell handover within a concentric cell fails, the handover from
OL subcell to UL subcell is not allowed
withinTIMEOTOUFAILPUN(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l If a UL subcell to OL subcell handover within a concentric cell fails, the handover from
UL subcell to OL subcell is not allowed
withinTIMEUTOOFAILPUN(BSC6900,BSC6910).

Basic Ranking
Basic ranking is performed after handover penalty to generate a candidate cell list in
descending order taking the following information into account: receive levels of the serving
cell and neighboring cells carried in the MRs, hysteresis, usage of TCHs in the neighboring
cells, and so on.
l In the case of non-directed retry, if an MS in an external BSC cell occupies an SDCCH
and INRBSCSDHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No), this cell should be
removed from the candidate cell list. In other words, the handover to this external BSC
cell is prohibited.
l If a neighboring GSM cell and the serving cell are controlled by the same BSC and the
TCH usage of the neighboring cell is 100%, the neighboring cell should be removed
from the candidate cell list; that is, the handover to this neighboring cell is prohibited.
l If the downlink receive level of a neighboring GSM cell is less than the sum of
HOCDCMINDWPWR(BSC6900,BSC6910) and MINOFFSET(BSC6900,BSC6910),
the neighboring cell should be removed from the candidate cell list; that is, the handover
to this neighboring cell is prohibited.
l If the uplink receive level of a neighboring GSM cell is less than the sum of
HOCDCMINUPPWR(BSC6900,BSC6910) and MINOFFSET(BSC6900,BSC6910),
the neighboring cell should be removed from the candidate cell list; that is, the handover
to this neighboring cell is prohibited.
l If a neighboring UMTS cell is a frequency division duplex (FDD) cell, the cell is
processed according to FDDREP(BSC6900,BSC6910):
– If FDDREP(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to EcNo(Ec/No), and the Ec/No of a
neighboring cell is less than MINECNOTHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910), the
neighboring cell should be removed from the candidate cell list; that is, the
handover to this neighboring cell is prohibited.
– If FDDREP(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to RSCP(RSCP), and the received signal
code power (RSCP) of a neighboring cell is less than
MINRSCPTHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910), the neighboring cell should be removed
from the candidate cell list; that is, the handover to this neighboring cell is
prohibited.
l If a neighboring UMTS cell is a time division duplex (TDD) cell and the RSCP after
penalty is less than the MINRSCPTHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910), the neighboring cell
should be removed from the candidate cell list; that is, the handover to this neighboring
cell is prohibited.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

l Calculate the difference between the downlink receive level of the neighboring cells and
the downlink receive level of the serving cell. Based on the difference, rank the
neighboring cells in descending order.

Network Characteristics Adjustment


Factors considered during network characteristics adjustment have higher priorities than those
considered during basic ranking.
During network characteristic adjustment, the following factors are considered based on their
priorities from high to low:
l Whether the serving cell and a neighboring cell share the same BSC or MSC
l Load in a cell
l Layer where a cell is located
After performing basic ranking on all candidate cells based on their priorities, the BSC ranks
these cells again to determine their comprehensive priorities.
After network characteristics adjustment, the BSC generates a final candidate cell list
(including the serving cell and neighboring cells). The candidate cells are ranked based on
their priorities from high to low. Then, the BSC starts the handover decision procedure.
If HOPRIOMODEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No): In handover algorithm II, the
emergency handover decision is made before network characteristics adjustment and forced
handover and after handover penalty (except load handover penalty) and basic ranking. Load
handover penalty is performed before network characteristics adjustment and after an
emergency handover. After the emergency handover decision,
LOADHOPENVALUE(BSC6900,BSC6910) is subtracted from the signal level of the
original cell within the time specified by LOADHOPENTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910) if the
load handover is successful. After load handover penalty, the signal level of the target cell
changes. Therefore, the network characteristics need to be readjusted.
If HOPRIOMODEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes): In handover algorithm II, all
handover decisions are made after handover penalty, basic ranking, network characteristics
adjustment, and forced handovers.

3.3 Forced Handover


A forced handover does not require a handover decision.
A forced handover is triggered in the following scenarios:
l If no TCH is available in the serving cell which the MS attempts to access and
DIRECTRYEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), the BSC triggers a directed
retry procedure.
l When a BTS is under maintenance, the MSs served by the BTS should be handed over to
the cells controlled by a functional BTS. This ensures that no call drop occurs during the
BTS maintenance.

Directed Retry
When the MS initiates a call, after the BSC receives an ASSIGN REQ message from the
MSC, the BSC determines an assignment mode based on the load of the serving cell.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

NOTE

Assignment mode is categorized into normal assignment procedure, mode modification procedure, and
directed retry procedure. The commands issued by the BSC vary according to the procedure.
l For a normal assignment procedure, the BSC activates a channel and issues a channel assignment
command.
l For a mode modification procedure, the BSC issues a mode modification command.
l For a directed retry procedure, the BSC issues a handover command.

If the serving cell is so overloaded that new calls cannot be admitted or admitting new calls
will affect ongoing services, the BSC triggers a directed retry procedure. By using the
directed retry, the MS is handed over to the target cell and part of the traffic in the serving cell
is distributed to the target cell. This avoids traffic congestion in the serving cell.
(GBFD-110607 Directed Retry)
Figure 3-1 shows the procedure for a directed retry decision.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

Figure 3-1 Procedure for a directed retry decision

When ASSLOADJUDGEEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to DISABLE(Disable), the BSC


triggers a directed retry procedure after completing basic ranking if the load of the serving cell
exceeds 100%.

As shown in Figure 3-1, directed retry is categorized into enhanced dual-band network
directed retry and normal directed retry.

l Enhanced Dual-Band Network Directed Retry


In an enhanced dual-band network, two cells form a group and the MS camps on one of
the two cells. After the directed retry is triggered, the MS is handed over to the other cell.
For details on the conditions of triggering an enhanced dual-band network directed retry,
see 3.4.7 Enhanced Dual-Band Network Handover and 3.5.6 Enhanced Dual-Band
Network Handover.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

l Target Cell Selection in a Normal Directed Retry Procedure


The target cell must have the highest priority in the candidate cell list after handover
preprocessing. In addition, the target cell must meet the following conditions:
l The serving cell does not function as a target cell.
l Load of the candidate neighboring cells ≤ DTLOADTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910)
l In handover algorithm II, serving cell level < receive level of neighboring cells < serving
cell level + DRHOLEVRANGE(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l In handover algorithm I, receive level of neighboring cells ≥
MINPWRLEVDIRTRY(BSC6900,BSC6910).
If DRTAGCELLSEL(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), the MS can be handed over to
one of multiple candidate cells by using directed retry. If
DRTAGCELLSEL(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No), the MS can be handed over to
only one target cell. The number of available candidate cells is controlled by
HOTRYCNT(BSC6900,BSC6910).

3.4 Handover Decision Based on Handover Algorithm I


This section describes the feature GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover.
According to the emergency condition of an MS in the network, the handover decision based
on handover algorithm I is made in the following order: quick handover, emergency handover,
enhanced dual-band network handover, load handover, and normal handover.
Handover decision based on handover algorithm I involves the following procedures:

l Determines whether the serving cell meets the trigger conditions.


l Selects corresponding candidate cells.
In handover algorithm I, HOOPTSEL(BSC6900,BSC6910) specifies whether a neighboring
GSM or UMTS cell is preferred.

l When HOOPTSEL(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to Pre_2G_Cell(Preference for 2G


cell):
A neighboring GSM cell is preferred. If the candidate cell list contains suitable
neighboring UMTS cells but no suitable neighboring GSM cells, a neighboring UMTS
cell is selected.
l When HOOPTSEL(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to Pre_3G_Cell(Preference for 3G
cell):
A neighboring UMTS cell is preferred. If the candidate cell list contains suitable
neighboring GSM cells but no suitable neighboring UMTS cells, a neighboring GSM
cell is selected.
l When HOOPTSEL(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to Pre_2G_CellThres(Preference 2G
cell by thresh):
If the receive level of a candidate GSM cell is lower than or equal to the threshold
specified by HOPRETH2G(BSC6900,BSC6910), a neighboring UMTS cell is preferred.
If the trigger conditions for an emergency handover are met and there is at least one candidate
cell, the emergency handover timer NEWURGHOMININTV(BSC6900,BSC6910) is started.
Another emergency handover decision can be performed only when
NEWURGHOMININTV(BSC6900,BSC6910) times out.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 20


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

3.4.1 Quick Handover


This section describes the features GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover and GBFD-510102
Fast Move Handover.
Quick handover aims to increase the handover success rate of an MS moving at a high speed
and to ensure the call continuity and low call drop rate. Quick handover applies to the
scenario where an MS moves fast along an urban backbone road, a selected route, or a high-
speed railroad.

Quick Handover Types


Quick handover consists of frequency offset handover and fast move handover.

l Frequency offset handover


Whether the MS moves away from the serving cell is determined based on the frequency
offset information provided by an MS moving at a high speed. Frequency offset
handover decision is made according to the uplink/downlink receive level of the serving
cell and the path loss of neighboring cells.
l Fast move handover
Fast move handover decision is made according to the path loss of neighboring cells.
For quick handover, the handover response speed is enhanced by:

l Accurately calculating the move speed of the MS


l Lifting the restriction on the interval between handover decisions
l Reducing the number of MRs for the handover decision
l Introducing the alpha filtering

Quick Handover Preparation


The preparation for quick handover involves the following aspects:

l Frequency offset is decoded from the MR.


Frequency offset of the MS is obtained from the uplink MR that the BTS sends to the
BSC.
l Alpha filtering is performed on the MR. The value of
SCELLFILTER(BSC6900,BSC6910) is used as the filter length for the serving cell, and
the value of NCELLFILTER(BSC6900,BSC6910) is used as the filter length for a
neighboring cell.
l If the number of MRs consecutively discarded in the serving cell is greater than the value
of IGNOREMRNUM(BSC6900,BSC6910), the BSC clears the MR queue for the
serving cell and does not perform a handover decision.
l If the number of MRs consecutively discarded in a neighboring cell is greater than the
value of IGNOREMRNUM(BSC6900,BSC6910), the BSC clears the MR queue for the
neighboring cell and does not perform a handover decision.

Trigger Conditions
During the handover decision, it is first determined whether the trigger conditions for a
frequency offset handover are met. When the BTS cannot send the frequency offset

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

information or the reported frequency offset information is invalid, a fast move handover is
triggered, provided that other conditions for a frequency offset handover are met.

If QUICKHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), the trigger conditions for a quick


handover are as follows:

l The MS moves away from the serving cell (the frequency offset in the measurement
result is a negative value) and the move speed of the MS is greater than
MOVESPEEDTHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The filtered uplink level of the serving cell is less than
HOUPTRIGE(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The compensated downlink level of the serving cell is less than
HODOWNTRIGE(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The difference between the path loss of a chain neighboring cell and that of the serving
cell is greater than the predefined threshold.
The predefined threshold is equal to the value of HOOFFSET(BSC6900,BSC6910) (in
the SET GCELLHOFAST command for an internal neighboring cell or in the MOD
GEXT2GCELL command for an external neighboring cell) plus the value of
ADJHOOFFSET(BSC6900,BSC6910) for the serving cell.

The trigger conditions for a quick handover are as follows:

l If all the last three conditions are met, the handover decision is made as follows:
– If the conditions for determining a frequency offset handover are met for a period
longer than AFCHOSTATTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910) during
AFCHOLASTTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910), a frequency offset handover is
triggered.
– If QUICKPBGTHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes) and the first
condition is not met, a fast move handover is triggered.
– If QUICKPBGTHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No), a fast move
handover is not triggered.
l If all the last three conditions are not met, a quick handover is not triggered.
l When MSLEVSTRQPBGT(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), the BSC triggers a
fast handover only if an MS moves away from the BTS.

Target Cell Selection


The target cell must be a chain neighboring cell of the serving cell. The target cell can be
obtained through the setting of ISCHAINNCELL(BSC6900,BSC6910). If
HODIRFORECASTEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), a neighboring cell in the
moving direction of the MS is selected preferentially.

To forecast the moving direction of the MS, when


HODIRFORECASTEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), the direction of a chain
neighboring cell (A or B) compared with the serving cell is specified by
CHAINNCELLTYPE(BSC6900,BSC6910). If the number of times that the MS is handed
over to neighboring cells in the same direction (B for example) is greater than or equal to
HODIRLASTTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910) when the handover time reaches
HODIRSTATIME(BSC6900,BSC6910), the MS is inferred to be moving towards the B
direction. Subsequently, the MS is preferentially handed over to the neighboring cell whose
CHAINNCELLTYPE(BSC6900,BSC6910) is B.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 22


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

Limitations
The limitations on quick handover are as follows:
l The serving cell cannot be selected as the target cell.
l The candidate cells for quick handover must be chain neighboring cells of the serving
cell.
l If quick handover penalty is enabled, after a quick handover is successful, the penalty is
performed on the original cell during the penalty time to prevent an immediate handover
back to the original cell. Quick handover penalty is determined jointly by
QuickHoPunishSw(BSC6910,BSC6900), TIMEPUNISH(BSC6900,BSC6910)
and HOPUNISHVALUE(BSC6900,BSC6910) . The penalty time and penalty value are
specified by TIMEPUNISH(BSC6900,BSC6910) and
HOPUNISHVALUE(BSC6900,BSC6910) respectively.

3.4.2 TA Handover
TA handover is a type of emergency handover. The TA handover decision is made according
to the TA value reported by the MS.
The TA value of a normal cell ranges from 0 to 63 and that of an extended cell ranges from 0
to 219. The TA can be stepped up or down in steps of 553.5 m. The TA value of 63
corresponds to a distance of 35 km.

Trigger Conditions
TA handover is triggered when the following conditions are met:
l TAHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes).
l Filtered TA value in the MR provided by the MS is greater than or equal to
TALIMIT(BSC6900,BSC6910).
NOTE

From the perspective of the trigger conditions for a TA handover, TA can be regarded as a limitation to
the size of a cell.

Target Cell Selection


The target cell must have the highest priority in the candidate cell list after handover
preprocessing. In addition, the target cell must meet the following conditions:
l The serving cell cannot be selected as the target cell.
l If TALIMIT(BSC6900,BSC6910) of a co-site neighboring cell is less than or equal to
the TALIMIT(BSC6900,BSC6910) of the serving cell, a handover to the neighboring
cell is prohibited.
If the trigger conditions for a TA handover are met but the candidate 2G cells are not suitable,
the following operations are performed:
l If a neighboring UMTS cell is available, if
INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), and if the MS
supports the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover, the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover is
performed.
l If no neighboring UMTS cell is available, if
INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No), or if the MS does

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 23


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

not support the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover, the decision on whether to initiate
another type of emergency handover is made.

Limitations
After the TA handover is successful, the penalty is performed on the original cell. During
TIMETAPUNISH(BSC6900,BSC6910), SSTAPUNISH(BSC6900,BSC6910) is subtracted
from the level of the original cell to prevent an immediate handover back to the original cell.

3.4.3 BQ Handover
BQ handover is a type of emergency handover in which the system makes the decision based
on the uplink/downlink receive quality on the Um interface.
The receive quality is measured in bit error rate (BER). The BSC measures the quality of a
radio link based on the quality band in the MR. The probable cause of an increase in BER is
that the signal power is too low or the channel interference increases.

Trigger Conditions
If BQHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), the BQ handover is triggered when
either of the following conditions are met:
l The uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the uplink receive quality threshold
of the serving cell.
l The downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the downlink receive quality
threshold of the serving cell.
The parameters for specifying the uplink and downlink receive quality thresholds are as
follows:
l For non-AMR calls, the parameter for specifying the uplink receive quality threshold is
ULQUALIMIT(BSC6900,BSC6910) and the parameter for specifying the downlink
receive quality threshold is DLQUALIMIT(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l For AMR FR calls, the parameter for specifying the uplink receive quality threshold is
ULQUALIMITAMRFR(BSC6900,BSC6910) and the parameter for specifying the
downlink receive quality threshold is DLQUALIMITAMRFR(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l For AMR HR calls, the parameter for specifying the uplink receive quality threshold is
ULQUALIMITAMRHR(BSC6900,BSC6910) and the parameter for specifying the
downlink receive quality threshold is DLQUALIMITAMRHR(BSC6900,BSC6910).

Target Cell Selection


The target cell that has the highest priority in the candidate cell list after handover
preprocessing must meet the conditions listed below:
If the target cell is a neighboring cell:
l If BqNCellAbsThresSw(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to ON(On), Filtered downlink
receive level of the target cell > neighboring cell's HOTHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910) +
( BQMARGIN(BSC6910,BSC6900) –64)
l If BqNCellAbsThresSw(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to OFF(Off), Filtered downlink
receive level of the target cell > Filtered downlink receive level of the serving cell after
compensation + ( INTERCELLHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910) of the serving cell

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 24


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

configured for the neighboring cell – 64) – ( BQMARGIN(BSC6900,BSC6910) –


64)
NOTE

l If there is only one cell in the candidate cell list and the cell is a neighboring cell, the preceding
condition does not need to be met.
l If there is more than one cell in the candidate cell list and the cells are neighboring cells:
-If there is more than one cell in the candidate cell list and the cells are neighboring cells:If
INTRACELLSINUSEREN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No), no intra-cell handover is
allowed within the time specified by BANTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910) when multiple intra-cell
handovers are performed consecutively.
-If INTRACELLSINUSEREN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), no quality-related intra-cell
handovers (such as BQ handover, interference handover, TCHH-to-TCHF handover, and tight
BCCH handover) is allowed within the time specified by BANTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910) when the
same MS consecutively performs multiple such types of handovers.

If the target cell is not a neighboring cell:

l An MS is handed over to the serving cell when the following conditions are met:
– INTRACELLHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes).
– BADQUALHOOPTALLOW(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No).-
– The serving cell is not in the intra-cell handover penalty state.
Specifically, the MS is preferentially handed over to a channel with a different
frequency band, different frequency, different TRX, or different timeslot (handover
priority: channel with a different frequency band > channel with a different
frequency > channel with a different TRX > channel with a different timeslot).
l An MS is not handed over to the serving cell if either of the following conditions is met:
– Both INTRACELLHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) and
BADQUALHOOPTALLOW(BSC6900,BSC6910) are set to YES(Yes)
– INTRACELLHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No).

Limitations
If the trigger conditions for a BQ handover are met but the candidate 2G cells are not suitable,
the following operations are performed:

l If a neighboring UMTS cell is available, if


INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), and if the MS
supports the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover, the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover is
performed.
l If no neighboring UMTS cell is available, if
INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No), or if the MS does
not support the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover, the decision on whether to initiate
another type of emergency handover is made.

After the BQ handover is successful, the penalty is performed on the original cell. During
TIMEBQPUNISH(BSC6900,BSC6910), SSBQPUNISH(BSC6900,BSC6910) is subtracted
from the level of the original cell to prevent an immediate handover back to the original cell.

3.4.4 Rapid Level Drop Handover


Rapid level drop handover is a type of emergency handover.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 25


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

In edge handover and PBGT handover, the mean value filtering and P/N decision methods are
not responsive to short-period rapid level drop. Therefore, to solve the rapid level drop
problem, the finite impact response filtering can be performed on the original receive level.
This filtering method is responsive to the rapid level drop based on the drop slope of the
original receive level.

Trigger Conditions
If RXQCKFALLHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), the trigger conditions for a
rapid level drop handover are as follows:
l Filtered uplink level < ULEDGETHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910)
l A1 x C(nt) + A2 x C(nt - t) + A3 x C(nt - 2t) + … + A8 x C(nt - 7t) < B
where,
– A1 indicates FLTPARAA1(BSC6900,BSC6910)
– A2 indicates FLTPARAA2(BSC6900,BSC6910)
– A3 indicates FLTPARAA3(BSC6900,BSC6910)
– A4 indicates FLTPARAA4(BSC6900,BSC6910)
– A5 indicates FLTPARAA5(BSC6900,BSC6910)
– A6 indicates FLTPARAA6(BSC6900,BSC6910)
– A7 indicates FLTPARAA7(BSC6900,BSC6910)
– A8 indicates FLTPARAA8(BSC6900,BSC6910)
– B indicates FLTPARAB(BSC6900,BSC6910)

Target Cell Selection


The target cell must have the highest priority in the candidate cell list after handover
preprocessing. In addition, the target cell must meet the following conditions:
l The target cell has a higher priority than the serving cell.
l The serving cell cannot be selected as the target cell.
If the trigger conditions for a rapid level drop handover are met but the candidate 2G cells are
not suitable, the following operations are performed:
l If a neighboring UMTS cell is available, if
INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), and if the MS
supports the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover, the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover is
performed.
l If no neighboring UMTS cell is available, if
INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No), or if the MS does
not support the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover, the decision on whether to initiate
another type of emergency handover is made.

3.4.5 Interference Handover


In handover algorithm I, if INTERHOOPTALLOW(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No),
interference handover is regarded as a type of emergency handover; if
INTERHOOPTALLOW(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), interference handover is
not regarded as a type of emergency handover and the decision on interference handover is
made after a decision on AMR handover is made.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 26


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

Interference handover helps protect calls affected by interference and reduce network
interference. It is applicable in scenarios with interference.

In handover algorithm I, the difference between interference handover and BQ handover is as


follows: In BQ handover, the bad signal quality resulting from both coverage and interference
is checked. In interference handover, the bad signal quality resulting from coverage is not
checked.

Trigger Conditions
If INTERFHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), the interference handover is
triggered when either of the following conditions are met:

l The filtered value of uplink receive quality is greater than the specified receive quality
threshold at the current uplink receive level.
l The filtered value of downlink receive quality is greater than the specified receive
quality threshold at the current downlink receive level.

The parameters for specifying the uplink and downlink receive quality thresholds are as
follows:

l For non-AMR FR calls, the parameter for specifying the receive quality threshold is
RXQUALn, where 1 ≤ n ≤ 12.
NOTE

Non-AMR FR calls consist of FR, HR, EFR, and AMR HR calls.


l For AMR FR calls, the parameters for specifying the receive quality threshold are
RXQUALn (1 ≤ n ≤ 12) and RXLEVOFF(BSC6900,BSC6910).
– If n = 1, the receive quality threshold is RXQUAL1(BSC6900,BSC6910).
– If 2 ≤ n ≤ 12, and the filtered value of uplink and downlink receive quality -
RXLEVOFF(BSC6900,BSC6910)>0, use the value of the filtered value of uplink
and downlink receive quality - RXLEVOFF(BSC6900,BSC6910).
– If 2 ≤ n ≤ 12, and the filtered value of uplink and downlink receive quality-
RXLEVOFF(BSC6900,BSC6910)≤0, use the value of the filtered value of uplink
and downlink receive quality.

Target Cell Selection


In handover algorithm I, the target cell must have the highest priority in the candidate cell list.
In addition, the target cell must meet the following conditions:

l If INTRACELLHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes) and the intra-cell


handover penalty timer expires, the serving cell can be selected as the target cell.
l If both INTRACELLHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) and
INTERHOOPTALLOW(BSC6900,BSC6910) are set to YES(Yes), only the serving cell
can be selected as the target cell.
l If INTRACELLHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes) and
INTERHOOPTALLOW(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No), either the serving cell
or a neighboring cell can be selected as the target cell. If
INTRACELLHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No), the serving cell cannot be
selected as the target cell.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 27


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

NOTE

l If INTRACELLSINUSEREN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No), no intra-cell handover is


allowed within the time specified by BANTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910) when multiple intra-cell
handovers are performed consecutively.
l If INTRACELLSINUSEREN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), no quality-related intra-cell
handovers (such as BQ handover, interference handover, TCHH-to-TCHF handover, and tight
BCCH handover) is allowed within the time specified by BANTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910) when the
same MS consecutively performs multiple such types of handovers.
l If the filtered level of a neighboring cell after handover penalty ≥ HOTHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910)
of the neighboring cell + INTELEVHOHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910) – 64, this neighboring cell can
serve as the target cell.

If the trigger conditions for an interference handover are met but the candidate 2G cells are
not suitable, the following operations need to be performed:
l If a neighboring UMTS cell is available, if
INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), and if the MS
supports the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover, the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover is
performed.
l If no neighboring UMTS cell is available, if
INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No), or if the MS does
not support the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover, the decision on whether to initiate
another type of emergency handover is made.

Interference Handover Process


Figure 3-2 shows the interference handover process.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 28


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

Figure 3-2 Interference handover process

NOTE

l For non-AMR FR calls, "A" ranges from RXQUAL1(BSC6900,BSC6910) to


RXQUAL12(BSC6900,BSC6910). Non-AMR FR calls consist of FR, HR, EFR, and AMR HR calls.
l For AMR FR calls, "A" equals RXQUAL1(BSC6900,BSC6910) or the sum of a value from
RXQUAL2(BSC6900,BSC6910) to RXQUAL12(BSC6900,BSC6910) and
RXLEVOFF(BSC6900,BSC6910).
In Figure 3-2, "A" indicates the receive quality threshold under the current uplink or downlink signal
level.

3.4.6 Handover Due to No Downlink Measurement Report


Handover due to no downlink measurement report is performed on the basis of the uplink
quality. The purpose is to ensure the call continuity and minimize the possibility of call drops.

Handover due to no downlink measurement report is generally caused by adverse radio


environment on the uplink. In this case, the requirements of the filtering algorithm cannot be
met, so other handover decisions cannot be performed.

Trigger Conditions
In handover algorithm I, the trigger conditions for a no-DL-MR handover (referred to as no-
DL-MR handover) are as follows:

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 29


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

l NODLMRHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes).


l There is no downlink information in the MR of the call.
l The filtered value of uplink quality is greater than or equal to
NODLMRHOQUALLIMIT(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The number of lost downlink MRs is less than
NODLMRHOALLOWLIMIT(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l For TCH, the number of saved MRs with uplink quality value is greater than
DATAQUAFLTLEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) ; for SDCCH, the number of saved MRs with
uplink quality value is greater than SIGQUAFLTLEN(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l In addition, the BSC triggers a no-DL-MR handover when MRs of the serving cell keep
lost for NODLMRHOLASTTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910) within
NODLMRHOSTATTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910).

Target Cell Selection


In handover algorithm I, the conditions for selecting the target cell are as follows:
l The ranked neighboring cells recorded in the last complete MR are saved as candidate
cells.
l A neighboring cell is preferentially selected as the target cell. If
BADQUALHOOPTALLOW(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), only a
neighboring cell can be selected as the target cell.
l If no neighboring cell is available, or if
BADQUALHOOPTALLOW(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No), the serving cell is
selected as the target cell.

3.4.7 Enhanced Dual-Band Network Handover


Enhanced dual-band network handover is performed based on the traffic volume of the OL
and UL cells and based on the receive level.
Enhanced dual-band network handover is classified into the following types:
l Handover due to high load in the UL cell
l Handover due to low load in the UL cell
l Handover due to MS movement to the border of the OL cell

Trigger Conditions for a Handover Due to High Load in the Underlaid Cell
The trigger conditions for a handover due to high load in the UL cell are as follows:
l The two cells are in the enhanced dual-band network and
OUTLOADHOENABLE(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes).
l The MS supports the frequency band on which the OL cell operates.
l The handover due to high load in the UL cell is performed only on TCHs.
l The load in the UL cell is greater than or equal to
OUTGENOVERLDTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The load in the OL cell is less than INNSERIOVERLDTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The system traffic volume is less than or equal to
EDBSYSFLOWLEV(BSC6900,BSC6910).

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 30


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

l The receive level in the overlaid subcell is greater than or equal to


INTOINNREXLEVTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The receive level in the underlaid subcell is greater than or equal to
INTOINNREXLEVTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The receive level in the underlaid subcell minus the receive level of the optimal
neighboring cell is greater than the sum of ATCBTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910) and
ATCBHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910).

When all the preceding conditions are met, the handover due to high load in the UL cell is
triggered.

If the load of the UL subcell in the cell is greater than or equal to


OUTSERIOVERLDTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910), the handover margin is adjusted in a
period of OUTLOADHOPERIOD(BSC6900,BSC6910) subtracted by
OUTLOADHOMODPERI(BSC6900,BSC6910). The step length for handover margin
adjustment is specified by OUTLOADHOSTEP(BSC6900,BSC6910).

Trigger Conditions for a Handover Due to Low Load in the Underlaid Cell
The trigger conditions for a handover due to low load in the UL cell are as follows:

l The load in the UL cell is less than OUTLOWLOADTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910).


l The system traffic volume is less than or equal to
EDBSYSFLOWLEV(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The current call is within the handover margin and the receive level is greater than or
equal to OUTINNREXLEVTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910).

When all the preceding conditions are met, the handover due to low load in the UL cell is
triggered.

If the load of the UL subcell in the cell is less than


OUTLOWLOADTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910) for a specified period, the handover margin is
adjusted in a period of INNLOADHOPERI(BSC6900,BSC6910). The step length for
handover margin adjustment is specified by INNLOADHOSTEP(BSC6900,BSC6910).

Trigger Conditions for a Handover Due to MS Movement to the Border of the


Overlaid Cell
The trigger conditions for a handover due to MS movement to the border of the OL cell are as
follows:

l SS(s) < Thdouter


l SS(u) – SS(n) < ATCB_THRD – ATCB_HYST
where,
– SS(s): specifies the filtering compensated downlink receive level in the serving cell.
– Thdouter: specifies OUTINNREXLEVTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910).
– SS(u): specifies the downlink level (power compensation is performed on the
downlink level based on the measurement) of the UL subcell where the call is
originated. If the SS(u) value cannot be obtained, the decision of enhanced dual-
band network handover is not performed and the decision condition is met by
default.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 31


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

– SS(n): The best neighboring cell is the one whose measured BCCH level is the
highest among neighboring cells. SS(n) is the signal level of the best neighboring
cell that works on the same frequency band, locates at the same layer, and has the
same priority as the UL cell but is not co-sited with the UL cell. If such a
neighboring cell is not available, the value of SS(n) is –110 dBm.
– ATCB_THRD: specifies ATCBTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910).
– ATCB_HYST: specifies ATCBHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910).
Handover due to MS movement to the border of the OL cell is triggered if either of
the preceding conditions is met.
NOTE

l In the Adapter distance To Cell Border (ATCB) handover algorithm, the border between the OL and
UL subcells is determined according to the signal strength of the serving cell and that of neighboring
cells. If SS(s) = SS(n), the system considers that the MS is located at the border of the UL cell. If
SS(s) – SS(n) > ATCB_THRD, the system considers that the MS is located in the coverage area of
the OL subcell. The coverage area of the OL subcell is determined according to different networking
and coverage conditions of the existing network. In addition, the OL subcell of the serving cell and
the OL subcell of the neighboring cells will not overlap regardless of the distance between BTSs.
l The handover margin specifies the range of signal level. In the case of OL/UL load handover on the
enhanced dual-band network, the MSs whose downlink levels are within the handover margin are
handed over level by level.

Target Cell Selection


The requirements for target cell selection in the enhanced dual-band network are as follows:

l For the handover due to high load in the UL cell, the MS must be handed over to the OL
cell.
l For the handover due to low load in the UL cell, the MS must be handed over to the UL
cell.
l For the handover due to MS movement to the border of the OL cell, the MS is handed
over to the neighboring cell that ranks first among neighboring cells. The MS should not
be handed over to the cell that ranks after the serving cell. Generally, the target cell is the
UL cell. The target cell can also be another neighboring cell.

Limitations
The limitations on the handover due to high load in the UL cell are as follows:

l If the cell where the call is located is on an enhanced dual-band network,


CELLINEXTP(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to Extra(Extra).
l The OUTLOADHOENABLE(BSC6900,BSC6910) parameter should be set.
l The maximum range of the handover margin is from 63 to
INTOINNREXLEVTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910). The MS with the highest receive
level is handed over first.

The limitations on the handover due to low load in the UL cell are as follows:

l If the cell where the call is located is on the enhanced dual-band network,
CELLINEXTP(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to Inner(Inner).
l The INNLOADHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) parameter should be set.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 32


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

l The maximum range of the handover margin is from 63 to


OUTINNREXLEVTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910). The MS with the lowest receive level
is handed over first.
The limitations on the handover due to MS movement to the border of the OL cell are as
follows:
l If the cell where the call is located is on the enhanced dual-band network,
CELLINEXTP(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to Inner(Inner).

Impact of the Enhanced Dual-Band Network Handover on the Existing


Algorithm
The impact of the enhanced dual-band network handover on the existing algorithm is as
follows:
l On the enhanced dual-band network, the MS should not be handed over to a cell in the
same UL/OL cell group when the load handovers between the OL cell and the UL cell
(specified by OUTLOADHOENABLE(BSC6900,BSC6910) and
INNLOADHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910)) are allowed. This is to prevent a load handover
of a normal cell from colliding with a load handover between the OL cell and the UL cell
on the network.
l The PBGT handover algorithm may cause inter-cell handovers. Therefore, to avoid ping-
pong handovers, PBGT handovers are restricted in either of the following conditions:
– When INNLOADHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), PBGT
handovers from the underlaid subcell to the overlaid subcell are prohibited.
– When OUTLOADHOENABLE(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), PBGT
handovers from the overlaid subcell to the underlaid subcell are prohibited.

3.4.8 Load Handover


In the network, some cells carry heavy load whereas the overlapping upper-layer cells and the
neighboring cells may carry light load. The load handover is required to balance the load of
these cells.
In a load handover procedure, some load in heavy-load cells is switched to light-load cells.
Meanwhile, the load in neighboring cells is not switched to heavy-load cells.
Load handover can be performed between cells at different layers. Figure 3-3 shows the
details.

NOTE

For details about the inter-RAT load handover, see Interoperability Between GSM and WCDMA
Feature Parameter Description.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 33


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

Figure 3-3 Load handover between cells

To perform load sharing, increase DLEDGETHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910) to enable the edge


handover area to shrink towards the center of the serving cell so that the load at the border of
a cell is switched to a neighboring cell with light load.
Whether a cell carries heavy load or light load is determined by the traffic volume in the cell,
that is, whether the traffic volume (generally TCH usage) in the cell exceeds the preset
threshold.
The TCH usage is calculated using the following formula:
TCH usage = (Number of occupied TCHFs x 2 + Number of occupied TCHHs)/(Number of
available TCHFs x 2 + Number of available TCHHs)
where
Number of available TCHHs is the sum of idle and occupied TCHHs.
Number of available TCHFs is the sum of idle and occupied TCHFs.
l If the traffic volume in a cell is greater than TRIGTHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910), the load
in this cell is heavy. The load handover algorithm needs to be enabled.
l If the traffic volume in a cell is less than LoadAccThres(BSC6900,BSC6910), the load
in this cell is light and the cell can receive load from the heavy-load cells.
Load handover may lead to many handovers. Therefore, the load of the system CPU should be
considered before load handover is performed. In other words, the system traffic volume
should be taken into account. In addition, to prevent too many MSs from being handed over at
a time, load handover is performed step by step. In other words, the edge handover threshold
is increased on the basis of LOADHOSTEP(BSC6900,BSC6910) (CLS_Ramp) and
LOADHOPERIOD(BSC6900,BSC6910) (CLS_Period). When the increase in the edge
handover threshold equals LOADOFFSET(BSC6900,BSC6910) (CLS_Offset), the edge
handover threshold is not increased any more. See Figure 3-4 for details.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 34


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

Figure 3-4 Load handover

Trigger Conditions
If LoadHoEn(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), the trigger conditions for a load
handover are as follows:
l The CPU usage of the system is less than or equal to
SYSFLOWLEV(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The current load of the serving cell is greater than or equal to
TRIGTHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910).

Target Cell Selection


The conditions for selecting the target cell are as follows:
l Filtered receive level after handover penalty ≥ HOTHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910) +
INTELEVHOHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910) – 64
l The serving cell cannot be selected as the target cell.
l If the target cell and the serving cell are in the same BSC, a load handover is performed
when the current load of the target cell is less than LoadAccThres(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l If the target cell and the serving cell are not in the same BSC, a load handover is
performed when the load of the target cell is less than
LoadAccThres(BSC6900,BSC6910) and OutBscLoadHoEn(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set
to YES(Yes).

Load Handover Process


Figure 3-5 shows the load handover process.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 35


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

Figure 3-5 Load handover process

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 36


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

Examples
The system assigns MSs to different load handover margins based on the downlink receive
level. The load handover algorithm is used to hand over the MSs out of a cell step by step.
1. The MSs in load handover margin 1 are handed over to the neighboring cells. Load
handover margin 1 specifies the area where the downlink level ranges from
DLEDGETHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910) to the sum of
DLEDGETHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910) and LOADHOSTEP(BSC6900,BSC6910).
2. After a LOADHOPERIOD(BSC6900,BSC6910) elapses, the MSs in load handover
margin 2 are handed over to the neighboring cells. Load handover margin 2 specifies the
area where the downlink level ranges from DLEDGETHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910) to
the sum of DLEDGETHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910) and (2 x
LOADHOSTEP(BSC6900,BSC6910)).
3. The load handover stops when the traffic volume in the cell is less than or equal to
TRIGTHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910).
The load handover is performed step by step to prevent call drops caused by a sudden increase
in CPU load or the congestion in the target cell.

3.4.9 Enhanced Load Handover


Like the load handover, the enhanced load handover is used to balance load of cells in a
network. Unlike the load handover, the enhanced load handover considers the handover
quality and the load in the target cell before the handover is performed. In this way, the
possibility of low level and congestion due to heavy load in the target cell after the handover
is minimized. The enhanced load handover is applicable to the scenario where multiple base
stations are located at the same place.

Trigger Conditions for an Enhanced Load Handover


If LOADHOAD(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(YES), the trigger conditions for an
enhanced load handover are as follows:
l The CPU usage of the current system is less than or equal to
SYSFLOWLEV(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The load of the serving cell is greater than TRIGTHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910).
Here, the load of the serving cell is expressed in the percentage of the channels that are
occupied. If the built-in PCU is used, the calculation method of the cell load depends on the
setting of LOADSTATYPE(BSC6900,BSC6910). The setting of the parameter determines
whether the dynamic PDCHs that can be preempted are considered as occupied channels.
l When LOADSTATYPE(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NODYNPDCH(Not count
dynamic PDCH), the dynamic PDCHs that can be preempted are not considered in the
cell load.
l When LOADSTATYPE(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to DYNPDCHASOCCUPY(Count
dynamic PDCH(Occupy)), the dynamic PDCHs that can be preempted are considered
as occupied TCHs in the cell load.
l When LOADSTATYPE(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to DYNPDCHASIDLE(Count
dynamic PDCH(Idle)), the dynamic PDCHs that can be preempted are considered as
idle TCHs in the cell load.
The number of the dynamic PDCHs that can be preempted depends on the number of dynamic
PDCHs and DYNCHNPREEMPTLEV(BSC6900,BSC6910). The number of dynamic

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 37


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

PDCHs is the total number of channels whose CHTYPE(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to


FULLTCH.
If the external PCU is used, the number of the dynamic PDCHs that can be preempted is
always zero. The setting of LOADSTATYPE(BSC6900,BSC6910) is irrelevant to calculation
of the cell load.

Target Cell Selection


When a candidate cell satisfying the following conditions is found and not a single MS within
the range specified by LOADHOUSRRATIO(BSC6900,BSC6910) is handed over to the
target cell, further search of the target cell is stopped and current traffic is handed over to the
candidate cell. The detailed conditions for selecting the target cell are as follows:
l The value of LOADHOPBGTMARGIN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is not 0 and the path loss
in the serving cell minus that in the target cell is greater than
LOADHOPBGTMARGIN(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The load of the target cell is less than LoadAccThres(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The receive level of the target cell is greater than HOTHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910) of
the target cell + INTELEVHOHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910) of the handover from the
serving cell to the target cell - 64.
l Of all the MSs that are within the range specified by
LOADHOUSRRATIO(BSC6900,BSC6910) and meet the preceding conditions, only
one MS can initiate the handover at a time. This regulation prevents too many MSs from
being handed over to the target cell at one time and avoids congestion in the target cell.

3.4.10 Edge Handover


Edge handover is performed on the basis of receive level.
To trigger an edge handover, the receive level of the target cell should be at least one
hysteresis value (specified by INTERCELLHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910) – 64) greater than
the receive level of the serving cell.

Trigger Conditions
If FRINGEHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes) and
EDOUTHOADEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No), the trigger conditions for an edge
handover are as follows:
l Either of the following conditions is met:
– The filtered downlink receive level of the serving cell after compensation is less
than DLEDGETHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910).
– The filtered uplink receive level of the serving cell after compensation is less than
ULEDGETHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l Filtered downlink receive level of a neighboring cell after power control compensation >
Receive level of the serving cell + INTERCELLHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910) – 64
An edge handover is triggered when the P/N criterion is met, that is, when the previous
conditions are met for EDGELAST1(BSC6900,BSC6910) within
EDGESTAT1(BSC6900,BSC6910).
If both FRINGEHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) and EDOUTHOADEN(BSC6900,BSC6910)
are set to YES(Yes), the trigger conditions for an edge handover are as follows:

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 38


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

l Either of the following conditions is met:


– Filtered downlink receive level of the serving cell after compensation <
DLEDGETHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910) +
EDOUTHOOFFSET(BSC6900,BSC6910) – 64
– Filtered uplink receive level of the serving cell after compensation <
ULEDGETHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910) +
EDOUTHOOFFSET(BSC6900,BSC6910) – 64
l Filtered downlink receive level of a neighboring cell after power control compensation >
Receive level of the serving cell + INTERCELLHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910)– 64
An edge handover is triggered when the P/N criterion is met, that is, when the previous
conditions are met for EDGELAST1(BSC6900,BSC6910) within
EDGESTAT1(BSC6900,BSC6910).

NOTE

If FRINGEHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No), EDOUTHOADEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) and


EDOUTHOOFFSET(BSC6900,BSC6910)are invalid.

Figure 3-6 shows an edge handover.

Figure 3-6 Edge handover

Target Cell Selection


The target cell must have the highest priority among the candidate cells. In addition, it must
meet the following conditions:
l The serving cell cannot be selected as the target cell.
l After cells are ranked, the target cell must have a higher priority than the serving cell.
A cell becomes the target cell if the previous conditions are met for
EDGEADJLASTTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910) within
EDGEADJSTATTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910).
If the trigger conditions for an edge handover are met but the candidate 2G cells are not
suitable, the following operations are performed:
l If a neighboring UMTS cell is available, if
INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), and if the MS
supports the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover, the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover is
performed.
l If no neighboring UMTS cell is available, if
INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No), or if the MS does

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 39


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

not support the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover, the decision on whether to initiate
another type of handover is made.

3.4.11 Fast-Moving Micro Cell Handover


Fast-moving micro cell handover is performed from a micro cell to a macro cell according to
the relative speed of an MS so that the number of handovers can be minimized.

Fast-moving micro cell handover applies to the following scenarios:

l If an MS is moving fast in a micro cell, it is handed over to a macro cell.


l Time penalty is performed on the micro cell to prevent an MS that is moving fast in a
macro cell from entering a micro cell. This ensures that the fast-moving MS camps on
the macro cell.

Figure 3-7 shows a fast-moving micro cell handover.

Figure 3-7 Fast-moving micro cell handover

Trigger Conditions
If QCKMVHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), the handover decision procedure
of fast-moving micro cell handover is as follows:

l When the trigger conditions for an edge handover or PBGT handover are met, the fast-
moving micro cell handover decision is started.
l When the period during which the MS camps on the serving cell is shorter than
QCKTIMETH(BSC6900,BSC6910), the number of cells through which the fast-moving
MS passes is incremented by one.
NOTE

The cells counted by the system must locate at a layer lower than layer 4. In other words, it must be a
non-Umbrella cell.
l When the number of cells that the MS passes in fast movement reaches
QCKSTATCNT(BSC6900,BSC6910), the fast-moving micro cell handover is triggered

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 40


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

if the number of cells that the MS passes in fast movement counted by the system is
greater than or equal to QCKTRUECNT(BSC6900,BSC6910).

Target Cell Selection


In handover algorithm I, the target cell must have the highest priority in the candidate cell list.
In addition, the target cell must meet the following conditions:

l The target cell must be at layer 4, that is, Umbrella cell.


l Filtered receive level of the target cell ≥ HOTHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910) +
INTELEVHOHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910) – 64

Limitations
After the fast-moving micro cell handover is successful, the penalty is performed on all the
neighboring micro cells. During SPEEDPUNISHT(BSC6900,BSC6910),
SDPUNVAL(BSC6900,BSC6910) is subtracted from the receive level of every neighboring
micro cell.

Cell Layer and Cell Priority


With Huawei multiband handover algorithm, a proper traffic volume distribution can be
realized among multiple frequency bands.

Huawei multiband handover algorithm divides cells into four layers, with 16 priorities at each
layer. The LAYER(BSC6900,BSC6910) parameter specifies at which layer a cell is located.
This algorithm is applicable to complex networking scenarios. Figure 3-8 shows the cell
layers.

Figure 3-8 Cell layers

In Huawei multiband handover algorithm, a GSM network covering a certain area is divided
into four layers, which are:

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 41


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

l Layer 4: Umbrella cell. The umbrella cells are generally GSM900 cells having the wide
coverage feature. It also implements fast MS connection.
l Layer 3: Macro cell. The macro cells are generally GSM900 cells, which are commonly
used in current GSM system and serve majority of subscribers.
l Layer 2: Micro cell. The micro cells are generally DCS1800 cells having the small
coverage feature. They enable capacity expansion.
l Layer 1: Pico cell. The Pico cells are generally DCS1800 cells, which are used in hot
spots and blind spots.
The cell at the lower layer has a higher priority.
PRIOR(BSC6900,BSC6910) controls a handover between cells at the same layer. Each layer
has 16 priorities, numbered 1-16 respectively. A high value indicates a low priority. If the
cells at the same layer have different priorities, a cell with a smaller priority value has a
higher priority. PRIOR(BSC6900,BSC6910) along with LAYER(BSC6900,BSC6910)
determines the priority of a cell. The priority affects the sequence of neighboring cells for
handover.

3.4.12 Inter-Layer Handover


Inter-layer handover is a type of normal handover. It is used to enable the micro cells at low
layers (the priority is high) to absorb traffic volume.
The GSM network is divided into several layers to balance the traffic volume flexibly and to
meet the requirements of different network topologies. For details, see 3.4.11 Fast-Moving
Micro Cell Handover. In Huawei handover algorithm I, both inter-layer handovers and
PBGT handovers are better cell handovers. The inter-layer handover is performed between
different layers, whereas the PBGT handover is performed at the same layer.

Trigger Conditions
If LEVHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), the trigger conditions for an inter-
layer handover are as follows:
l The layer at which the target cell is located has a higher priority than the layer at which
the serving cell is located.
l Filtered downlink receive level of the target cell ≥ HOTHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910) +
INTELEVHOHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910) – 64
l After basic ranking and comprehensive ranking during network characteristics
adjustment, the target cell has a higher priority than the serving cell.
The inter-layer handover is triggered when the P/N criterion is met, that is, the previous
conditions are met for LEVLAST(BSC6900,BSC6910) within
LEVSTAT(BSC6900,BSC6910).
If NCELLPUNEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No) for the target cell, an inter-layer
handover is triggered when the previous conditions are met.
If NCELLPUNEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes) for the target cell, the timer
NCELLPUNTM(BSC6900,BSC6910) is started when the previous conditions are met . After
the timer is started, the value of NCELLPUNLEV(BSC6900,BSC6910) is subtracted from
the filtered receive level of the target cell . If the timer expires, an inter-layer handover is
triggered. If the timer stops, no inter-layer handover is triggered. The timer stops in either of
the following cases:

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 42


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

l If the filtered BCCH receive level of the target cell is less than the value of
NCELLPUNSTPTH(BSC6900,BSC6910), the timer stops for the target cell.
l If the trigger conditions for a BQ handover are met, the timer for all handover candidate
cells stops.

Target Cell Selection


The requirements for target cell selection are as follows:
l The trigger conditions are met.
l The serving cell cannot be selected as the target cell.
l The target cell has the highest priority in the candidate cell list.

Inter-Layer Handover Process


Figure 3-9 shows the inter-layer handover process.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 43


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

Figure 3-9 Inter-layer handover process

3.4.13 PBGT Handover


PBGT handover is a type of normal handover.

Trigger Conditions
If PBGTHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), the trigger conditions for a PBGT
handover are as follows:

l The target cell and the serving cell are at the same layer and have the same priority.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 44


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

l The following condition is met for PBGTLAST(BSC6900,BSC6910) within


PBGTSTAT(BSC6900,BSC6910) :
(MIN (MS_TXPWR_MAX, P) – RXLEV_DL – PWR_DIFF) – (MIN
(MS_TXPWR_MAX (n), P) – RXLEV_NCELL (n)) > PBGT_HO_MARGIN
where
– RXLEV_DL: indicates the filtered downlink receive level of the serving cell.
– MS_TXPWR_MAX: indicates the maximum allowed transmit power of an MS in
the serving cell.
– MS_TXPWR_MAX (n): indicates the maximum allowed transmit power of an MS
in neighboring cell n.
– RxLev_NCELL (n): indicates the downlink receive level in neighboring cell n.
– PWR_DIFF: indicates the difference between the maximum downlink transmit
power and the actual downlink transmit power in the serving cell. The difference is
caused by power control.
– P: indicates the maximum transmit power of an MS.
– PBGT_HO_MARGIN: indicates the PBGTMARGIN(BSC6900,BSC6910) of the
serving cell configured for neighboring cells minus 64.

If NCELLPUNEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No) for the target cell, a PBGT


handover is triggered when the previous conditions are met.

If NCELLPUNEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes) for the target cell, the timer


NCELLPUNTM(BSC6900,BSC6910) is started when the previous conditions are met . After
the timer is started, the value of NCELLPUNLEV(BSC6900,BSC6910) is subtracted from
the filtered receive level of the target cell. If the timer expires, a PBGT handover is triggered.
If the timer stops, no PBGT handover is triggered. The timer stops in either of the following
cases:

l If the filtered BCCH receive level of the target cell is less than the value of
NCELLPUNSTPTH(BSC6900,BSC6910), the timer stops for the target cell.
l If the trigger conditions for a BQ handover are met, the timer for all handover candidate
cells stops.

Target Cell Selection


The target cell must meet the following conditions:

l The target cell and the serving cell are at the same layer and have the same priority.
l The serving cell cannot be selected as the target cell.
l The target cell has the highest priority in the candidate cell list.

3.4.14 AMR Handover


This section describes the feature GBFD-115504 AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment.

The AMR handover in handover I algorithm consists of the AMR TCHF-TCHH handover
and AMR TCHH-TCHF handover algorithm. The AMR TCHF-TCHH handover is conducted
based on cell load and RQI, whereas the AMR TCHH-TCHF handover is conducted based on
RQI.

The conversion formula between RQI and C/I is RQI = 2 x C/I.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 45


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

The handover I algorithm also supports dynamic adjustment between TCHFs and TCHHs.
For details, see Dynamic Channel Conversion Feature Parameter Description. This section
describes the AMR handover in handover I algorithm.

Trigger Conditions for an AMR TCHF-TCHH Handover


The trigger conditions for an AMR TCHF-TCHH handover are as follows:

l INTRACELLFHHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes).


l The target call is an AMR call.
l The half-rate function must be enabled in the cell where the call is initiated.
l The full-rate speech version 3 and half-rate speech version 3 must be supported by the
cell where the call is initiated.
l The type of channel specified by the MSC during a call can be changed during a
handover.
l For AMR FR calls, if the parameter AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW(BSC6900,BSC6910)
is set to ON(On), TCHF-to-TCHH handover is triggered when the cell load is greater
than or equal to the value for the parameter
AMRTCHHPRIORLOAD(BSC6900,BSC6910) and the proportion of AMR HR users is
less than the value for the parameter
ALLOWAMRHALFRATEUSERPERC(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l For AMR FR calls, if the parameter AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW(BSC6900,BSC6910)
is set to OFF(Off), TCHF-to-TCHH handover is triggered when the proportion of AMR
HR users is less than the value for the parameter
ALLOWAMRHALFRATEUSERPERC(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The call occupies the full-rate TCH, and the RQI/2 is greater than
INHOF2HTH(BSC6900,BSC6910).

For an AMR FR call, the AMR TCHF-TCHH handover can be performed if the preceding
conditions are met for INFHHOLAST(BSC6900,BSC6910) within
INFHHOSTAT(BSC6900,BSC6910).

Trigger Conditions for an AMR TCHH-TCHF Handover


The trigger conditions for an AMR TCHH-TCHF handover are as follows:

l INTRACELLFHHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes).


l The target call is an AMR call.
l The half-rate function must be enabled in the cell where the call is initiated.
l The full-rate speech version 3 and half-rate speech version 3 must be supported by the
cell where the call is initiated.
l The type of channel specified by the MSC during a call can be changed during a
handover.
l The call occupies the half-rate TCH, and the RQI/2 is less than
INHOH2FTH(BSC6900,BSC6910).

For an AMR HR call, the AMR TCHH-TCHF handover can be performed if the preceding
conditions are met for INFHHOLAST(BSC6900,BSC6910) within
INFHHOSTAT(BSC6900,BSC6910).

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 46


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

NOTE

l If INTRACELLSINUSEREN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No), no intra-cell handover is


allowed within the time specified by BANTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910) when multiple intra-cell
handovers are performed consecutively.
l If INTRACELLSINUSEREN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), no quality-related intra-cell
handovers (such as BQ handover, interference handover, TCHH-to-TCHF handover, and tight
BCCH handover) is allowed within the time specified by BANTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910) when the
same MS consecutively performs multiple such types of handovers.

Target Cell Selection


The AMR handover is an intra-cell handover. Therefore, only the serving cell can be selected
as the target cell.

3.4.15 SDCCH Handover


This section describes the feature GBFD-110608 SDCCH Handover.

SDCCH handover is a process in which the MS is handed over from an SDCCH to another
SDCCH in an immediate assignment. SDCCH handover helps improve the access success
rate of the MSs on the edge of the network, improving the network QoS.

The principle of SDCCH handover is the same as that of TCH handover. Regarding
procedure, an SDCCH handover involves measurement and MR reporting, MR processing,
handover decision, and handover execution.

Whether an SDCCH handover can be performed is controlled by the


SIGCHANHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) parameter. If an inter-BSC SDCCH handover is
required, both SIGCHANHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) and
INRBSCSDHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) should be set to YES(Yes).

The handover decision algorithm for SDCCH handover is different from that for TCH
handover in the following ways:

l The algorithms for the following handovers support SDCCH handover:


Quick handover, TA handover, BQ handover, rapid level drop handover, interference
handover, no-DL-MR handover, Inter-layer handover, edge handover, and fast-moving
micro cell handover
l The algorithms for the following handovers do not support SDCCH handover:
Dual-band network handover, load handover, PBGT handover, AMR handover, better
3G cell handover, concentric cell handover, and tight BCCH handover

3.4.16 Other Handovers


Other handovers here refer to better 3G cell handover and tight BCCH handover.

Better 3G Cell Handover


See Interoperability Between GSM and WCDMA Feature Parameter Description.

Tight BCCH Handover


See BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing Feature Parameter Description.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 47


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

3.5 Handover Decision Based on Handover Algorithm II


This section describes the feature GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover.

Handover decision based on handover algorithm II is made in the following order: forced
handover, emergency handover, intra-cell handover, and inter-cell handover.

Handover decision based on handover algorithm II involves the following procedures:

l Determines whether the serving cell meets the trigger conditions.


l Selects corresponding candidate cell list for each handover type.
l Performs the comprehensive decision and determining the candidate neighboring cells.

The procedure for performing comprehensive decision based on handover results and
determining the candidate neighboring cells is as follows:

1. The BSC selects a handover type with the highest priority from all the handovers that
can be performed on each neighboring cell.
The handover priority is as follows:
– Forced handover, emergency handover, and interference handover have a high
priority. Figure 3-10 shows the details.

Figure 3-10 Handovers with high priority

NOTE

Quick handover is classified into frequency offset handover and fast move handover. Frequency
offset handover has a higher priority than fast move handover.
– Intra-cell handover (excluding interference handover) and inter-cell handover have
a normal priority. Figure 3-11 shows the details.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 48


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

NOTE

AMR handover has the same priority as TCHF-TCHH handover.

Figure 3-11 Handovers with normal priority

2. The BSC ranks the candidate cells according to the network characteristics adjustment
algorithm and then generates the final candidate cell list. Every neighboring cell in the
candidate cell list has its own handover decision. Neighboring GSM and UMTS cells are
ranked separately.
3. In handover algorithm II, HOOPTSEL(BSC6900,BSC6910) specifies whether a
neighboring GSM or UMTS cell is preferred.
– When HOOPTSEL(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to Pre_2G_Cell(Preference for 2G
cell):
A neighboring GSM cell is preferred. If the candidate cell list contains suitable
neighboring UMTS cells but no suitable neighboring GSM cells, a neighboring
UMTS cell is selected.
– When HOOPTSEL(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to Pre_3G_Cell(Preference for 3G
cell):
A neighboring UMTS cell is preferred. If the candidate cell list contains suitable
neighboring GSM cells but no suitable neighboring UMTS cells, a neighboring
GSM cell is selected.
– When HOOPTSEL(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to Pre_2G_CellThres(Preference
2G cell by thresh):
If the receive level of a candidate 2G cell is less than or equal to
HOPRETH2G(BSC6900,BSC6910), a neighboring UMTS cell is preferred.
NOTE

When a neighboring UMTS cell is preferred among the candidate cells, the priority of 3G better-
cell handover is the lowest.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 49


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

If the trigger conditions for an emergency handover are met and there is at least one
candidate cell, the emergency handover timer
NEWURGHOMININTV(BSC6900,BSC6910) is started. Another emergency handover
decision can be performed only when NEWURGHOMININTV(BSC6900,BSC6910)
times out.

3.5.1 Quick Handover


This section describes the features GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover and GBFD-510102
Fast Move Handover.
Quick handover aims to increase the handover success rate of an MS moving at a high speed
and to ensure the call continuity and low call drop rate. Quick handover applies to the
scenario where an MS moves fast along an urban backbone road, a selected route, or a high-
speed railroad.

Quick Handover Types


Quick handover consists of frequency offset handover and fast move handover.
l Frequency offset handover
Whether the MS moves away from the serving cell is determined based on the frequency
offset information provided by an MS moving at a high speed. Frequency offset
handover decision is made according to the uplink/downlink receive level of the serving
cell and the path loss of neighboring cells.
l Fast move handover
Fast move handover decision is made according to the path loss of neighboring cells.
For quick handover, the handover response speed is enhanced by:
l Accurately calculating the move speed of the MS
l Lifting the restriction on the interval between handover decisions
l Reducing the number of MRs for the handover decision
l Introducing the alpha filtering

Quick Handover Preparation


The preparation for quick handover involves the following aspects:
l Frequency offset is decoded from the MR.
Frequency offset of the MS is obtained from the uplink MR that the BTS sends to the
BSC.
l Alpha filtering is performed on the MR. The value of
SCELLFILTER(BSC6900,BSC6910) is used as the filter length for the serving cell, and
the value of NCELLFILTER(BSC6900,BSC6910) is used as the filter length for a
neighboring cell.
l If the number of MRs consecutively discarded in the serving cell is greater than the value
of IGNOREMRNUM(BSC6900,BSC6910), the BSC clears the MR queue for the
serving cell and does not perform a handover decision.
l If the number of MRs consecutively discarded in a neighboring cell is greater than the
value of IGNOREMRNUM(BSC6900,BSC6910), the BSC clears the MR queue for the
neighboring cell and does not perform a handover decision.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 50


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

Trigger Conditions
During the handover decision, it is first determined whether the trigger conditions for a
frequency offset handover are met. When the BTS cannot send the frequency offset
information or the reported frequency offset information is invalid, a fast move handover is
triggered, provided that other conditions for a frequency offset handover are met.

If QUICKHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), the trigger conditions for a quick


handover are as follows:

l The MS moves away from the serving cell (the frequency offset in the measurement
result is a negative value) and the move speed of the MS is greater than
MOVESPEEDTHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The filtered uplink level of the serving cell is less than
HOUPTRIGE(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The compensated downlink level of the serving cell is less than
HODOWNTRIGE(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The difference between the path loss of a chain neighboring cell and that of the serving
cell is greater than the predefined threshold. The threshold is equal to the value of
HOOFFSET (in the SET GCELLHOFAST command for an internal neighboring cell
or in the MOD GEXT2GCELL command for an external neighboring cell) plus the
value of ADJHOOFFSET for the serving cell.

The trigger conditions for a quick handover are as follows:

l If all the last three conditions are met, the handover decision is made as follows:
– If the first condition is met for AFCHOLASTTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910) during
AFCHOSTATTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910), a frequency offset handover is
triggered.
– If QUICKPBGTHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes) and the first
condition is not met, a fast move handover is triggered.
– If QUICKPBGTHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No), a fast move
handover is not triggered.
l If all the last three conditions are not met, a quick handover is not triggered.
l When MSLEVSTRQPBGT(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), the BSC triggers a
fast handover only if an MS moves away from the BTS.

Target Cell Selection


The target cell must be a chain neighboring cell of the serving cell. The target cell can be
obtained through the setting of ISCHAINNCELL(BSC6900,BSC6910). If
HODIRFORECASTEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), a neighboring cell in the
moving direction of the MS is selected preferentially.

To forecast the moving direction of the MS, the direction of a chain neighboring cell (A or B)
compared with the serving cell is specified by CHAINNCELLTYPE(BSC6900,BSC6910). If
the number of times that the MS is handed over to neighboring cells in the same direction (B
for example) is greater than or equal to HODIRLASTTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910) when the
handover time reaches HODIRSTATIME(BSC6900,BSC6910), the MS is inferred to be
moving towards the B direction. Subsequently, the MS is preferentially handed over to the
neighboring cell whose CHAINNCELLTYPE(BSC6900,BSC6910) is B.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 51


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

Limitations
The limitations on quick handover are as follows:
l The serving cell cannot be selected as the target cell.
l The candidate cells for quick handover must be chain neighboring cells of the serving
cell.
l If quick handover penalty is enabled, after a quick handover is successful, the penalty is
performed on the original cell during the penalty time to prevent an immediate handover
back to the original cell. Quick handover penalty is determined jointly by
QuickHoPunishSw(BSC6910,BSC6900), TIMEPUNISH(BSC6900,BSC6910)
and HOPUNISHVALUE(BSC6900,BSC6910) . The penalty time and penalty value are
specified by TIMEPUNISH(BSC6900,BSC6910) and
HOPUNISHVALUE(BSC6900,BSC6910) respectively.

3.5.2 TA Handover
TA handover is a type of emergency handover. The TA handover decision is made according
to the TA value reported by the MS.
The TA value of a normal cell ranges from 0 to 63 and that of an extended cell ranges from 0
to 229. The TA can be stepped up or down in steps of 553.5 m. The TA value of 63
corresponds to a distance of 35 km.

Trigger Conditions
TA handover is triggered when the following conditions are met:
l TAHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes).
l Filtered TA value in the MR provided by the MS is greater than or equal to
TALIMIT(BSC6900,BSC6910).
The TA handover can be triggered only when the preceding two conditions are met
simultaneously.

NOTE

From the perspective of the trigger conditions for a TA handover, TA can be regarded as a limitation to
the size of a cell.

Target Cell Selection


The target cell must have the highest priority in the candidate cell list after handover
preprocessing. In addition, the target cell must meet the following conditions:
l The serving cell cannot be selected as the target cell.
l If TALIMIT(BSC6900,BSC6910) of a co-site neighboring cell is less than or equal to
the TALIMIT(BSC6900,BSC6910) of the serving cell, a handover to the neighboring
cell is prohibited.
l In handover algorithm II, a cell becomes the target cell for TA handover if the previous
conditions are met for TALASTTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910) within
TASTATTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910).
If the trigger conditions for a TA handover are met but the candidate 2G cells are not suitable,
the following operations are performed:

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 52


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

l If a neighboring UMTS cell is available, if


INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), and if the MS
supports the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover, the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover is
performed.
l If no neighboring UMTS cell is available, if
INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No), or if the MS does
not support the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover, the decision on whether to initiate
another type of emergency handover is made.

Limitations
After the TA handover is successful, the penalty is performed on the original cell. During
TIMETAPUNISH(BSC6900,BSC6910), SSTAPUNISH(BSC6900,BSC6910) is subtracted
from the level of the original cell to prevent an immediate handover back to the original cell.

3.5.3 BQ Handover
BQ handover is a type of emergency handover in which the system makes the decision based
on the uplink/downlink receive quality on the Um interface.

Receive quality is represented by BER. The BSC measures the quality of a radio link based
on the quality band in the MR. The probable cause of an increase in BER is that the signal
power is too low or the channel interference increases.

Trigger Conditions
If BQHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), the trigger conditions for a BQ
handover are as follows:

l The uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the uplink receive quality threshold
of the serving cell.
l The downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the downlink receive quality
threshold of the serving cell.

The BQ handover is triggered when either of the preceding conditions is met.

The parameters for specifying the uplink and downlink receive quality thresholds are as
follows:

l For non-AMR calls, the parameter for specifying the uplink receive quality threshold is
ULQUALIMIT(BSC6900,BSC6910) and the parameter for specifying the downlink
receive quality threshold is DLQUALIMIT(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l For AMR FR calls, the parameter for specifying the uplink receive quality threshold is
ULQUALIMITAMRFR(BSC6900,BSC6910) and the parameter for specifying the
downlink receive quality threshold is DLQUALIMITAMRFR(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l For AMR HR calls, the parameter for specifying the uplink receive quality threshold is
ULQUALIMITAMRHR(BSC6900,BSC6910) and the parameter for specifying the
downlink receive quality threshold is DLQUALIMITAMRHR(BSC6900,BSC6910).

Target Cell Selection


The target cell must have the highest priority in the candidate cell list after handover
preprocessing. In addition, the target cell must meet the following conditions:

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 53


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

l In handover algorithm II, the serving cell cannot be selected as the target cell.
l The receive level of target cell must meet the following conditions:
– The serving cell and the target cell work in the same frequency band.
Filtered downlink receive level of the target cell > Filtered downlink receive level
of the serving cell after compensation + (INTERCELLHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910)
of the serving cell configured for the neighboring cell – 64) –
(BQMARGIN(BSC6900,BSC6910) – 64)
– The serving cell works in GSM900 and the target cell works in DCS1800.
Filtered downlink receive level of the target cell ≥
HOTHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910) + (LEVHOHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910) – 64).
– The serving cell works in DCS1800 and the target cell works in GSM900.
There is no constraint on the target cell in this condition.
l In handover algorithm II, a cell becomes the target cell for BQ handover if the previous
conditions are met for BQLASTTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910) within
BQSTATTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910).
If the trigger conditions for a BQ handover are met but the candidate 2G cells are not suitable,
the following operations are performed:
l If a neighboring UMTS cell is available, if
INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), and if the MS
supports the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover, the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover is
performed.
l If no neighboring UMTS cell is available, if
INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No), or if the MS does
not support the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover, the decision on whether to initiate
another type of emergency handover is made.

Limitations
After the BQ handover is successful, the penalty is performed on the original cell. During
TIMEBQPUNISH(BSC6900,BSC6910), SSBQPUNISH(BSC6900,BSC6910) is subtracted
from the level of the original cell to prevent an immediate handover back to the original cell.

3.5.4 Interference Handover


Interference handover is a type of intra-cell handover in handover algorithm II.
Interference handover helps protect calls affected by interference and reduce network
interference. It is applicable in scenarios with interference.
In handover algorithm II, the BQ handover is a type of emergency handover and the
interference handover is a type of intra-cell handover.

Trigger Conditions
If INTRACELLHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes) and
INTERFHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), the trigger conditions for an
interference handover are as follows:
l The filtered value of uplink receive quality is greater than the specified receive quality
threshold at the current uplink receive level.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 54


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

l The filtered value of downlink receive quality is greater than the specified receive
quality threshold at the current downlink receive level.
In handover algorithm II, the interference handover is triggered when the previous conditions
are met for INTERFERELASTTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910) within
INTERFERESTATTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910).
The parameters for specifying the uplink and downlink receive quality thresholds are as
follows:
l For non-AMR FR calls, the parameter for specifying the receive quality threshold is
RXQUALn, where 1 ≤ n ≤ 12. If 2 ≤ n ≤ 12, the receive quality threshold is equal to the
sum of RXQUALn, FHGAINOFFSET(BSC6900,BSC6910), and quality offset.
NOTE

Non-AMR FR calls consist of FR, HR, EFR, and AMR HR calls.


l For AMR FR calls, the parameters for specifying the receive quality threshold are
RXQUALn (1 ≤ n ≤ 12) and RXLEVOFF(BSC6900,BSC6910).
– If n = 1, the receive quality threshold is RXQUAL1(BSC6900,BSC6910).
– If 2 ≤ n ≤ 12, and the filtered value of uplink and downlink receive quality -
RXLEVOFF(BSC6900,BSC6910) >0, use the value of the filtered value of uplink
and downlink receive quality - RXLEVOFF(BSC6900,BSC6910).
– If 2 ≤ n ≤ 12, and the filtered value of uplink and downlink receive quality-
RXLEVOFF(BSC6900,BSC6910) ≤0, use the value of the filtered value of uplink
and downlink receive quality.

Target Cell Selection


In handover algorithm II, only the serving cell can be selected as the target cell.

Limitations
If INTRACELLSINUSEREN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No) and multiple
consecutive intra-cell handovers are performed, the BSC forbids any intra-cell handovers
within the duration specified by BANTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910).
If INTRACELLSINUSEREN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes) and an MS performs
multiple quality-based intra-cell handovers (such as BQ handover, interference handover,
TCHH-to-TCHF handover, and tight BCCH handover), the BSC forbids the MS to perform
any quality-based intra-cell handovers within the duration specified by
BANTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910).

3.5.5 Handover Due to No Downlink Measurement Report


Handover due to no downlink measurement report is performed on the basis of the uplink
quality. The purpose is to ensure the call continuity and minimize the possibility of call drops.
Handover due to no downlink measurement report is generally caused by adverse radio
environment on the uplink. In this case, the requirements of the filtering algorithm cannot be
met, so other handover decisions cannot be performed.

Trigger Conditions
In handover algorithm II, the trigger conditions for a no-DL-MR handover are as follows:

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 55


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

l NODLMRHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes).


l There is no downlink information in the MR of the call.
l The number of lost downlink MRs is less than
NODLMRHOALLOWLIMIT(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l For TCH, the number of saved MRs with uplink quality value is greater than
DATAQUAFLTLEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) ; for SDCCH, the number of saved MRs with
uplink quality value is greater than SIGQUAFLTLEN(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The filtered value of uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to
ULQUALIMIT(BSC6900,BSC6910).
– For AMR FR calls, the corresponding parameter is
ULQUALIMITAMRFR(BSC6900,BSC6910).
– For AMR HR calls, the corresponding parameter is
ULQUALIMITAMRHR(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l In addition, the BSC triggers a no-DL-MR handover when MRs of the serving cell keep
lost for NODLMRHOLASTTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910) within
NODLMRHOSTATTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910).

Target Cell Selection


In handover algorithm II, the conditions for selecting the target cell are as follows:
l The ranked neighboring cells recorded in the last complete MR are saved as candidate
cells.
l Only a neighboring cell can serve as the target cell.
l Receive level in neighboring cell > Filtered receive level in serving cell +
( INTERCELLHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910) – 64) –
( BQMARGIN(BSC6900,BSC6910) – 64)
l A neighboring cell serves as the target cell if the previous conditions are met for
ULBQLASTTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910) within
ULBQSTATTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910).

3.5.6 Enhanced Dual-Band Network Handover


Enhanced dual-band network handover is performed based on the traffic volume of the OL
and UL cells and based on the receive level.
Enhanced dual-band network handover is classified into the following types:
l Handover due to high load in the UL cell
l Handover due to low load in the UL cell
l Handover due to MS movement to the border of the OL cell

Trigger Conditions for a Handover Due to High Load in the Underlaid Cell
The trigger conditions for a handover due to high load in the underlaid subcell are as follows:
l The two cells are in the enhanced dual-band network and
OUTLOADHOENABLE(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes).
l The MS supports the frequency band on which the overlaid subcell operates.
l The handover due to high load in the underlaid subcell is performed only on TCHs.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 56


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

l The load in the underlaid subcell is greater than or equal to


OUTGENOVERLDTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The load in the overlaid subcell is less than
INNSERIOVERLDTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The system traffic volume is less than or equal to
EDBSYSFLOWLEV(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The current call is within the handover margin, and the receive level in the overlaid
subcell is greater than or equal to INTOINNREXLEVTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The receive level in the underlaid subcell minus the receive level of the optimal
neighboring cell is greater than the sum of ATCBTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910) and
ATCBHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910).

When all the preceding conditions are met, the handover due to high load in the underlaid
subcell is triggered.

If the load of the UL subcell in the cell is greater than or equal to


OUTSERIOVERLDTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910), the handover margin is adjusted in a
period of OUTLOADHOPERIOD(BSC6900,BSC6910) subtracted by
OUTLOADHOMODPERI(BSC6900,BSC6910). The step length for handover margin
adjustment is specified by OUTLOADHOSTEP(BSC6900,BSC6910).

Trigger Conditions for a Handover Due to Low Load in the Underlaid Cell
The trigger conditions for a handover due to low load in the underlaid subcell are as follows:

l The load in the underlaid subcell is smaller than


OUTLOWLOADTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The system traffic volume is less than or equal to
EDBSYSFLOWLEV(BSC6900,BSC6910).
l The current call is within the handover margin and the receive level in the overlaid
subcell is greater than or equal to OUTINNREXLEVTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910).

When all the preceding conditions are met, the handover due to low load in the underlaid
subcell is triggered.

If the load of the UL subcell in the cell is less than


OUTLOWLOADTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910) for a specified period, the handover margin is
adjusted in a period of INNLOADHOPERI(BSC6900,BSC6910). The step length for
handover margin adjustment is specified by INNLOADHOSTEP(BSC6900,BSC6910).

Trigger Conditions for a Handover Due To MS Movement in the Overlaid


Subcell
The trigger conditions for the handover due to MS movement in the OL subcell are described
as follows:

l SS(s) < Thdouter


l SS(u) – SS(n) < ATCB_THRD – ATCB_HYST
where,
– SS(s): specifies the filtering compensated downlink receive level in the serving cell.
– Thdouter: specifies OUTINNREXLEVTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910).

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 57


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

– SS(u): specifies the downlink level (power compensation is performed on the


downlink level based on the measurement) of the UL subcell where the call is
originated. If the SS(u) value cannot be obtained, the decision of enhanced dual-
band network handover is not performed and the decision condition is met by
default.
– SS(n): The best neighboring cell is the one whose measured BCCH level is the
highest among neighboring cells. SS(n) is the level value of such an optimum
neighboring cell that is on the same frequency band, layer, and level with the UL
subcell but is not co-sited with the UL subcell. If such a neighboring cell is not
available, the value of SS(n) is –110 dBm.
– ATCB_THRD: specifies ATCBTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910).
– ATCB_HYST: specifies ATCBHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910).
Handover due to MS movement in the OL subcell is triggered if either of the
preceding conditions is met.
NOTE

l In the Adapter distance To Cell Border (ATCB) handover algorithm, the border between the OL and
UL subcells is determined according to the signal strength of the serving cell and that of neighboring
cells. If SS(s) = SS(n), the system considers that the MS is located at the border of the UL cell. If
SS(s) – SS(n) > ATCB_THRD, the system considers that the MS is located in the coverage area of
the OL subcell. The coverage area of the OL subcell is determined according to different networking
and coverage conditions of the existing network. In addition, the OL subcell of the serving cell and
the OL subcell of the neighboring cells will not overlap regardless of the distance between BTSs.
l The handover margin specifies the range of signal level. In the case of OL/UL load handover on the
enhanced dual-band network, the MSs whose downlink levels are within the handover margin are
handed over level by level.

Target Cell Selection


The requirements for target cell selection in the enhanced dual-band network are as follows:
l For the handover due to high load in the UL cell, the MS must be handed over to the OL
cell.
l For the handover due to low load in the UL cell, the MS must be handed over to the UL
cell.
l For the handover due to MS movement in the OL subcell, the MS must be handed over
to the UL cell.

Limitations
The limitations on the handover due to high load in the UL cell are as follows:
l If the cell where the call is located is on an enhanced dual-band network,
CELLINEXTP(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to Extra(Extra).
l The OUTLOADHOENABLE(BSC6900,BSC6910) parameter should be set.
l The maximum range of the handover margin is from 63 to
INTOINNREXLEVTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910). The MS with the highest receive
level is handed over first.
The limitations on the handover due to low load in the UL cell are as follows:
l If the cell where the call is located is on the enhanced dual-band network,
CELLINEXTP(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to Inner(Inner).

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 58


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

l The INNLOADHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) parameter should be set.


l The maximum range of the handover margin is from 63 to
OUTINNREXLEVTHRED(BSC6900,BSC6910). The MS with the lowest receive level
is handed over first.
The limitations on the handover due to MS movement in the OL subcell are described as
follows:
l The cell where the call is located is on the enhanced dual-band network.
CELLINEXTP(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to Inner(Inner).

Impact of the Enhanced Dual-Band Network Handover on the Existing


Algorithm
The impact of the enhanced dual-band network handover on the existing algorithm is as
follows:
On the enhanced dual-band network, the MS should not be handed over to a cell in the same
UL/OL cell group when the load handovers between the OL cell and the UL cell (specified by
OUTLOADHOENABLE(BSC6900,BSC6910) and INNLOADHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910))
are allowed. This is to prevent a load handover of a normal cell from colliding with a load
handover between the OL cell and the UL cell on the network.

3.5.7 Load Handover


In handover algorithm II, load handover is not decided independently.
In handover algorithm II, the load handover decision is made in network adjustment phase.
The selection of target cell should be processed by the better-cell handover. That is, the load
handover is triggered when the trigger conditions for a load handover and better-cell handover
are met simultaneously.
For the trigger conditions for a load handover, see 3.4.8 Load Handover. For the trigger
conditions for a better-cell handover, see 3.5.10 Better-Cell Handover.
The ranges of load handover margins are defined as follows:
l Load handover margin 1 specifies the area where the neighboring cell receive level
minus the downlink receive level of the serving cell ranges from
(INTERCELLHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910) – 64 –
LOADHOSTEP(BSC6900,BSC6910)) to (INTERCELLHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910) –
64).
l Load handover margin 2 specifies the area where the neighboring cell receive level
minus the downlink receive level of the serving cell ranges from
(INTERCELLHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910) – 64 –
LOADHOSTEP(BSC6900,BSC6910) x 2) to (INTERCELLHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910)
– 64).
If LoadHoEn(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes) and
LoadHoPunishInheritSwitch(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to ON(On), load handover supports
handover penalty inheritance.

3.5.8 Edge Handover


Edge handover is performed on the basis of receive level.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 59


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

To trigger an edge handover, the receive level of the target cell should be at least one
hysteresis value (specified by INTERCELLHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910) – 64) greater than
the receive level of the serving cell.

Trigger Conditions
If FRINGEHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), the trigger conditions for an edge
handover are as follows:

l Either of the following conditions is met:


– Filtered downlink receive level of the serving cell after compensation <
DLEDGETHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910)
– Filtered uplink receive level of the serving cell after compensation <
ULEDGETHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910)
l Receive level of a neighboring cell > Filtered downlink receive level of the serving cell
after power control compensation + ( INTERCELLHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910) – 64)

An edge handover is triggered when the P/N criterion is met, that is, when the previous
conditions are met for EDGELAST(BSC6900,BSC6910) within
EDGESTAT(BSC6900,BSC6910).

If both FRINGEHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) and EDOUTHOADEN(BSC6900,BSC6910)


are set to YES(Yes), the trigger conditions for an edge handover are as follows:

l Either of the following conditions is met:


– Filtered downlink receive level of the serving cell after compensation <
DLEDGETHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910) +
( EDOUTHOOFFSET(BSC6900,BSC6910) – 64)
– Filtered uplink receive level of the serving cell after compensation <
ULEDGETHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910) +
( EDOUTHOOFFSET(BSC6900,BSC6910) – 64)
l Receive level of a neighboring cell > Filtered downlink receive level of the serving cell
after power control compensation + ( INTERCELLHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910) – 64)

An edge handover is triggered when the P/N criterion is met.

NOTE

If FRINGEHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No), EDOUTHOADEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) and


EDOUTHOOFFSET(BSC6900,BSC6910) are invalid.

Figure 3-12 Edge handover

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 60


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

Target Cell Selection


The target cell must have the highest priority in the candidate cell list. In addition, it must
meet the following conditions:
l The serving cell cannot be selected as the target cell.
l After cells are ranked, the target cell must have a higher priority than the serving cell.
A cell becomes the target cell if the previous conditions are met for
EDGEADJLASTTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910) within
EDGEADJSTATTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910).
If the trigger conditions for an edge handover are met but the candidate 2G cells are not
suitable, the following operations are performed:
l If a neighboring UMTS cell is available, if
INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), and if the MS
supports the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover, the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover is
performed.
l If no neighboring UMTS cell is available, if
INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No), or if the MS does
not support the GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover, the decision on whether to initiate
another type of handover is made.

3.5.9 Fast-Moving Micro Cell Handover


Fast-moving micro cell handover is performed from a micro cell to a macro cell according to
the relative speed of an MS so that the number of handovers can be minimized.
Fast-moving micro cell handover applies to the following scenarios:
l If an MS is moving fast in a micro cell, it is handed over to a macro cell.
l To prevent an MS that is moving fast in a macro cell from entering a micro cell, time
penalty is performed on the micro cell so that the fast-moving MS camps on the macro
cell.
Figure 3-13 shows a fast-moving micro cell handover.

Figure 3-13 Fast-moving micro cell handover

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 61


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

Trigger Conditions
If QCKMVHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), the handover decision procedure
of fast-moving micro cell handover is as follows:
l When the trigger conditions for an edge handover or PBGT handover are met, the fast-
moving micro cell handover decision is started.
l When the period during which the MS camps on the serving cell is shorter than
QCKTIMETH(BSC6900,BSC6910), the number of cells through which the fast-moving
MS passes is incremented by one.
NOTE

The cells counted by the system must locate at a layer lower than layer 4. In other words, they must be
non-Umbrella cells.
l When the number of cells that the MS passes in fast movement reaches
QCKSTATCNT(BSC6900,BSC6910), the fast-moving micro cell handover is triggered
if the number of cells that the MS passes in fast movement counted by the system is
greater than or equal to QCKTRUECNT(BSC6900,BSC6910).

Target Cell Selection


In handover algorithm II, the target cell must have the highest priority in the candidate cell
list. In addition, the target cell must meet the following conditions:
l The target cell must be at layer 4, that is, Umbrella cell.
l Filtered receive level of the target cell ≥ HOTHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910) +
INTELEVHOHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910) – 64
l A neighboring cell serves as the target cell if the previous conditions are met for
HCSLASTTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910) within HCSSTATTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910).

Limitations
After the fast-moving micro cell handover is successful, the penalty is performed on all the
neighboring micro cells. During SPEEDPUNISHT(BSC6900,BSC6910),
SDPUNVAL(BSC6900,BSC6910) is subtracted from the receive level of every neighboring
micro cell.

Cell Layer and Cell Priority


With Huawei multiband handover algorithm, a proper traffic volume distribution can be
realized among multiple frequency bands.
Huawei multiband handover algorithm divides cells into four layers, with 16 priorities at each
layer. The LAYER(BSC6900,BSC6910) parameter specifies at which layer a cell is located.
This algorithm is applicable to complex networking scenarios. Figure 3-14 shows the cell
layers.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 62


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

Figure 3-14 Cell layers

In Huawei multiband handover algorithm, a GSM network covering a certain area is divided
into four layers, which are:
l Layer 4: Umbrella cell. The umbrella cells are generally GSM900 cells having the wide
coverage feature. It also implements fast MS connection.
l Layer 3: Macro cell. The macro cells are generally GSM900 cells, which are commonly
used in current GSM system and serve majority of subscribers.
l Layer 2: Micro cell. The micro cells are generally DCS1800 cells having the small
coverage feature. They enable capacity expansion.
l Layer 1: Pico cell. The Pico cells are generally DCS1800 cells, which are used in hot
spots and blind spots.
The cell at the lower layer has a higher priority.
PRIOR(BSC6900,BSC6910) controls a handover between cells at the same layer. Each layer
has 16 priorities, numbered 1-16 respectively. A high value indicates a low priority. If the
cells at the same layer have different priorities, a cell with a smaller priority value has a
higher priority. PRIOR(BSC6900,BSC6910) along with CELLLAYER(BSC6900,BSC6910)
determines the priority of a cell. The priority affects the sequence of neighboring cells for
handover.

3.5.10 Better-Cell Handover


Better-cell handover is an optimization of inter-layer handover and PBGT handover in
handover algorithm I. Better-cell handover is specific to handover algorithm II.

Trigger Conditions
If BETTERCELLHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), the trigger conditions for a
better-cell handover are as follows:
l If PATHLOSSHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes), path loss is taken into
consideration during the sorting of the serving cell and handover candidate cells. If

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 63


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

PATHLOSSHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No), path loss is not taken into


consideration during the sorting of the serving cell and handover candidate cells.
l If the serving cell is in the candidate cell list, the priorities of the handover candidate
cells must be higher than the priority of the serving cell after the sorting.
l If the serving cell is not in the candidate cell list, the handover candidate cells must meet
the following conditions:
– LoadHoEn(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to NO(No), or
LoadHoEn(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes) but the load in the serving cell
is less than TRIGTHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910).
– If the serving cell and the handover candidate cells are at the same layer and have
the same priority, the following conditions must be met: SS_DL(N) – SS_DL(S) >
H – 64
– SS_DL(N) indicates the filtered BCCH receive level of a target cell. SS_DL(S)
indicates the compensated receive level on the downlink TCH after filtration. H
indicates INTERCELLHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910) of the serving cell over the
neighboring cell.
Negative handover is a type of better-cell handover. When
INTERCELLHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to a value less than 64, the value of
H – 64 is negative. In this case, even if the downlink receive level in a candidate
cell is less than the downlink receive level in the serving cell, a negative handover
to the candidate cell can be performed.
– If the serving cell and the handover candidate cells are at different layers but have
the same priority, the following conditions must be met:
SS_DL(N) ≥ T_layer(N) + H_layer(S) - 64
SS_DL(N) indicates the filtered BCCH receive level of a target cell. T_layer(N)
indicates HOTHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910) of the target cell. H_layer(S) indicates
INTELEVHOHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910) of the serving cell.
– If LoadHoEn(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes) and the load in the serving
cell is greater than TRIGTHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910), better-cell handover can be
triggered.
l A neighboring cell becomes a target cell if the preceding conditions are met for
BETTERCELLLASTTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910) during
BETTERCELLLASTTIME(BSC6900,BSC6910).
If both EDOUTHOADEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) and NCELLPUNEN(BSC6900,BSC6910)
are set to NO(No) for the target cell, a better-cell handover is triggered when the previous
conditions are met.
If EDOUTHOADEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes) for the target cell, a better-cell
handover is triggered when the previous conditions and the following condition are met:
Filtered downlink receive level of the serving cell after power control compensation
≤ HOTHRES(BSC6900,BSC6910) – ( LEVHOHYST(BSC6900,BSC6910) +
EDOUTHOOFFSET(BSC6900,BSC6910) – 64)
If NCELLPUNEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) is set to YES(Yes) for the target cell, the timer
NCELLPUNTM(BSC6900,BSC6910) is started . After the timer is started, the value of
NCELLPUNLEV(BSC6900,BSC6910) is subtracted from the filtered receive level of the
target cell . If the timer expires, a better-cell handover is triggered. If the timer stops, no
better-cell handover is triggered. The timer stops when the filtered BCCH receive level of the
target cell is less than the value of NCELLPUNSTPTH(BSC6900,BSC6910).

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 64


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 3 Technical Description

Target Cell Selection


The requirements for target cell selection are as follows:
l The serving cell cannot be selected as the target cell.
l The target cell has the highest priority in the candidate cell list.

3.5.11 SDCCH Handover


This section describes the GBFD-110608 SDCCH Handover feature.
SDCCH handover is a process in which the MS is handed over from an SDCCH to another
SDCCH in an immediate assignment. SDCCH handover helps improve the access success
rate of the MSs on the edge of the network, improving the network QoS.
The principle of SDCCH handover is the same as that of TCH handover. Regarding
procedure, an SDCCH handover involves measurement and MR reporting, MR processing,
handover decision, and handover execution.
Whether an SDCCH handover can be performed is controlled by the
SIGCHANHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) parameter. If an inter-BSC SDCCH handover is
required, both SIGCHANHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) and
INRBSCSDHOEN(BSC6900,BSC6910) should be set to YES(Yes).
The handover decision algorithm for SDCCH handover is different from that for TCH
handover in the following ways:
l The following handover algorithms support SDCCH handover:
Quick handover, TA handover, BQ handover, interference handover, no-DL-MR
handover, edge handover, and fast-moving micro cell handover
l The following handover algorithms do not support SDCCH handover:
Enhanced dual-band network handover, load handover, better-cell handover, handover
between a full-rate TCH and a half-rate TCH, better 3G cell handover, concentric cell
handover, and tight BCCH handover

3.5.12 Other Handovers


Other handovers here refer to better 3G cell handover and tight BCCH handover.

Better 3G Cell Handover


See Interoperability Between GSM and WCDMA Feature Parameter Description.

Tight BCCH Handover


See BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing Feature Parameter Description.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 65


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 4 Related Features

4 Related Features

NOTE

The following handover algorithms do not have feature IDs: quick handover, TA handover, BQ
handover, interference handover, no-DL-MR handover, edge handover, and fast-moving micro cell
handover, enhanced dual-band network handover, load handover, better-cell handover, handover
between a full-rate TCH and a half-rate TCH, better 3G cell handover, concentric cell handover, and
tight BCCH handover.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 66


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 4 Related Features

4.1 GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover


Prerequisite Features
Feature ID Feature Name Description

GBFD-110801 Processing of This feature requires either of the


Measurement Report features.

GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of
Measurement Report

Mutually Exclusive Features


Feature ID Feature Name Description

GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover -

Impacted Features
None.

4.2 GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover


Prerequisite Features
Feature ID Feature Name Description

GBFD-110801 Processing of This feature requires either of the


Measurement Report features.

GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of
Measurement Report

Mutually Exclusive Features


Feature ID Feature Name Description

GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover -

Impacted Features
None.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 67


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 4 Related Features

4.3 GBFD-110607 Direct Retry


Prerequisite Features
Feature ID Feature Name Description

GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover This feature requires either of the


features.
GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover

Mutually Exclusive Features


None.

Impacted Features
Feature ID Feature Name Description

GBFD-111005 Enhanced Channel If channel allocation fails, directed retry


Assignment Algorithm can be triggered using a forced
handover. This increases the assignment
success rate.

4.4 GBFD-110608 SDCCH Handover


Prerequisite Features
Feature ID Feature Name Description

GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover This feature requires either of the


features.
GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover

Mutually Exclusive Features


None.

Impacted Features
None.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 68


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 4 Related Features

4.5 GBFD-110801 Processing of Measurement Report


Prerequisite Features
None.

Mutually Exclusive Features


Feature ID Feature Name Description

GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of
Measurement Report

Impacted Features
None.

4.6 GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of Measurement Report


Prerequisite Features
None.

Mutually Exclusive Features


Feature ID Feature Name Description

GBFD-110801 Processing of
Measurement Report

Impacted Features
None.

4.7 GBFD-510102 Fast Move Handover


Prerequisite Features
Feature ID Feature Name Description

GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover This feature requires either of the


features.
GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 69


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 4 Related Features

Feature ID Feature Name Description

GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover -

Mutually Exclusive Features


None.

Impacted Features
None.

4.8 GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover


Prerequisite Features
None.

Mutually Exclusive Features


None.

Impacted Features
None.

4.9 GBFD-117101 BTS power lift for handover


Prerequisite Features
Feature ID Feature Name Description

GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover This feature requires either of the


features.
GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover

Mutually Exclusive Features


None.

Impacted Features
None.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 70


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 4 Related Features

4.10 GBFD-115504 AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment


Prerequisite Features
Feature ID Feature Name Description

GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover This feature requires either of the


features.
GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover

GBFD-115502 AMR HR -

Mutually Exclusive Features


None.

Impacted Features
None.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 71


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 5 Network Impact

5 Network Impact

5.1 HUAWEI I Handover and HUAWEI II Handover


System Capacity
None

Network Performance
Either the HUAWEI I Handover feature or the HUAWEI II Handover feature must be enabled
to increase the handover success rate.

5.2 Direct Retry


System Capacity
With the Direct Retry feature, a heavy-traffic cell can share its traffic with neighboring cells.

Network Performance
This feature improves the immediate assignment success rate and assignment success rate, but
increases the number of handovers in heavy-traffic areas.

5.3 SDCCH Handover


System Capacity
The SDCCH Handover feature increases the CPU load because the BSC needs to process
SDCCH measurement reports and make handover decisions.

Network Performance
This feature reduces the SDCCH call drop rate and enhances Um-interface security, but
increases the number of handovers.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 72


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 5 Network Impact

5.4 Processing of Measurement Report


System Capacity
None

Network Performance
None

5.5 Pre-processing of Measurement Report


System Capacity
None

Network Performance
None

5.6 Fast Move Handover


System Capacity
None

Network Performance
The Fast Move Handover feature enables the BSC to hand over calls to a better cell based on
the path loss, increasing the handover success rate and decreasing the call drop rate.

5.7 Chain Cell Handover


System Capacity
None

Network Performance
When a fast-moving MS travels in chain cells along an urban backbone road, expressway, or
high-speed railway, the Chain Cell Handover feature increases the handover success rate,
improves voice quality, and decreases the call drop rate.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 73


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 5 Network Impact

5.8 BTS power lift for handover


System Capacity
None

Network Performance
The BTS power lift for handover feature increases the handover success rate and decreases
the call drop rate in areas with poor signal coverage.
This feature increases the probability that the BTS transmits signals with full power. The
larger the probability that the BTS transmits signals with full power, the stronger the co-
channel or adjacent channel interference to other cells, and the greater the fluctuation of the
downlink HQI.

5.9 AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment


System Capacity
The AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment feature enables automatic TCHF-to-TCHH
handovers when traffic is heavy, improving system capacity.

Network Performance
The AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment feature enables automatic TCHF-to-TCHH
handovers when traffic is heavy. This increases the number of handovers, deteriorates voice
quality, but improves system capacity.
The AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment feature enables automatic TCHH-to-TCHF
handovers when traffic is light. This increases the number of handovers but improves voice
quality.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 74


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

6 Engineering Guidelines

6.1 When to Use Handover

6.1.1 HUAWEI I Handover


It is recommended that the HUAWEI I Handover feature be used.

6.1.2 HUAWEI II Handover


It is recommended that the HUAWEI II Handover feature be used in a single-band and dual-
band hybrid network.

6.1.3 Direct Retry


It is recommended that the Direct Retry feature be used in cells where the assignment success
rate is low due to high load.

6.1.4 SDCCH Handover


It is recommended that the SDCCH Handover feature be used only in networks where
authentication is enabled. When authentication is enabled on a network, SDCCH immediate
assignment takes an extensive amount of time. This increases the probability of handovers
due to MS mobility and a high interception risk over the Um interface.

6.1.5 Processing of Measurement Report


Either the Processing of Measurement Report feature or the Pre-processing of Measurement
Report feature must be enabled. The Processing of Measurement Report feature is
recommended.

6.1.6 Pre-processing of Measurement Report


It is recommended that the Pre-processing of Measurement Report feature be used when the
BSC load is high.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 75


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

6.1.7 Fast Move Handover


It is recommended that the Fast Move Handover feature be used in chain cells along high-
speed railways or expressways.

6.1.8 Chain Cell Handover


It is recommended that the Chain Cell Handover feature be used in chain cells along high-
speed railways or expressways.

6.1.9 BTS power lift for handover


It is recommended that the BTS power lift for handover feature be used in scenarios where the
handover success rate is low due to coverage problems.

6.1.10 AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment


It is recommended that the AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment feature be used in scenarios
where traffic is heavy and the proportion of half-rate services is high.

6.2 Required Information

6.2.1 HUAWEI I Handover


None

6.2.2 HUAWEI II Handover


Before deploying the HUAWEI II Handover feature, collect the frequency planning
information about the cell.

6.2.3 Direct Retry


Before deploying the Direct Retry feature, collect the following information:

l Assignment success rate in the cell


l Proportion of assignment failures due to lack of channels
l Traffic volume in the cell
l Mean Duration of Busy State for Channels (TCH)

6.2.4 SDCCH Handover


Before deploying the SDCCH Handover feature, collect information about whether
authentication is enabled on the network from the CN.

6.2.5 Processing of Measurement Report


None

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 76


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

6.2.6 Pre-processing of Measurement Report


Before deploying the Pre-processing of Measurement Report feature, collect the CPU usage
of BSC boards. If the overall CPU load on the BSC is high and more functions or capacity
expansion is required, enable this feature so that the BTS preprocesses measurement reports.

6.2.7 Fast Move Handover


Before deploying the Fast Move Handover feature, collect information about the environment
within the cell.

6.2.8 Chain Cell Handover


Before deploying the Chain Cell Handover feature, collect information about the environment
within the cell.

6.2.9 BTS power lift for handover


Before deploying the BTS power lift for handover feature, collect the following information:

l Handover success rate in the cell


l Number of handover failures due to weak uplink or downlink signal strength
l Signal quality in the cell

6.2.10 AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment


Before deploying the AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment feature, collect the traffic volume
and the proportion of half-rate services in the cell.

6.3 Network Planning


None

6.4 Deploying HUAWEI I Handover

6.4.1 Deployment Requirements

Table 6-1 Deployment requirements


Aspect Requirement

Related features See 4 Related Features.

BSC None

BTS None

GSM networking None

MS None

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 77


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

Aspect Requirement

MSC None

License None

Others None

6.4.2 Precautions
l After a quick handover, BQ handover, or TA handover is complete, a handover penalty is
imposed on the original cell during the specified penalty period to prevent an immediate
handover back to the original cell.
l A BQ handover can be an intra- or inter-cell handover. If Bad Quality Handover
Optimization Allowed is set to YES(Yes), only an inter-cell BQ handover is allowed.
l If TA Threshold for a co-site neighboring cell is lower than or equal to that for the
serving cell, a TA handover to the neighboring cell is not allowed.
l An interference handover can be an intra- or inter-cell handover. If Interference
Handover Optimization Allowed is set to YES(Yes), only an intra-cell interference
handover is allowed. However, if intra-cell handovers have occurred several consecutive
times, an intra-cell handover is prohibited within a specified period.
l On an enhanced dual-band network, an MS cannot be handed over to a cell in the same
group when overlaid/underlaid load handovers, specified by Load HO From UL
Subcell to OL Subcell Allowed and Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell Enabled,
respectively, are allowed. This prevents conflicts between a load handover on a common
network and an overlaid/underlaid handover on an enhanced dual-band network.
l A PBGT handover to a cell in the same group is not allowed if it is triggered between
two cells on an enhanced dual-band network.
l After a fast-moving micro cell handover is complete, a handover penalty is imposed on
all neighboring micro cells.
l An SDCCH handover can be a quick handover, TA handover, BQ handover, quick level
drop handover, interference handover, no-DL-MR handover, edge handover, and fast-
moving micro cell handover. It cannot be an enhanced dual-band network handover, load
handover, inter-layer handover, PBGT handover, AMR handover, better 3G cell
handover, concentric cell handover, or tight BCCH handover.

6.4.3 Activation
Using MML Commands
On the BSC LMT, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with Current HO Control Algorithm set to
HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).
Step 2 Run the SET GCELLHOEMG command with Current HO Control Algorithm set to
HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).
Step 3 Run the SET GCELLHOFITPEN command with Current HO Control Algorithm set to
HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 78


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

Step 4 Run the SET GCELLHOIUO command with Current HO Control Algorithm set to
HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).
Step 5 Run the SET GCELLHOAD command with Max. Num. of HO Attempts set according to
onsite requirements.
Step 6 (Optional) To improve the handover and power control performance when the BCCH TRX
participates in baseband frequency hopping, run the SET GCELLCCCH command with
PWRC set to YES(Yes) and run the SET GCELLOTHEXT command with Power Control
and Handover CMP CON Sw set to YES(Yes).
Step 7 Activate the quick handover algorithm by performing the following steps:
1. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Index Type, Source Cell Index, Neighbor
2G Cell Index, and Neighboring Cell Type set according to actual conditions. If a
BSC6910 is used, set Is External Cell to an appropriate value.
2. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with its parameters set as follows:
– Set Chain Neighbor Cell to YES(Yes).
– Set Chain Neighbour Cell Type and Quick Handover Offset for Neighbor Cell
according to onsite requirements.
3. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with Quick Handover Enable set to
YES(Yes). If a fast move handover is required, set Quick PBGT Handover Enable to
YES(Yes).
NOTE

Quick handovers consist of fast move handovers and frequency offset handovers. Quick
Handover Enable controls whether to allow fast move handovers and frequency offset handovers.
Quick PBGT Handover Enable further controls whether to allow fast move handovers.
To enable the BSC to accurately make handover decisions, you are advised to set Quick PBGT
Handover Enabled to YES(Yes) in high-speed railway scenarios or chain cells along the
highway. In other scenarios, set Quick PBGT Handover Enabled to NO(No).
4. Run the SET GCELLHOFAST command with its parameters set as follows:
– Set Handover Direction Forecast Enable to YES(Yes).
– Set Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, Quick Handover Down Trigger Level,
Quick Move Speed Threshold, Serving Cell Filter Length MR Number,
Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number, Ignore Measurement Report
Number, Quick Handover Punish Time, Quick Handover Punish Value, Quick
Handover Offset, Handover Direction Forecast Statistic Times, Handover
Direction Forecast Last Times, Frequency Shift Handover Statistic Time, and
Frequency Shift Handover Duration according to onsite requirements.
NOTE

Run the MOD GEXT2GCELL command with Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish
Time, and Quick Handover Punish Value set to appropriate values for an external neighboring GSM
cell.
5. (Optional) Run the SET GCELLOTHEXT command with UL Frequency Adjust
Switch, DL Frequency Adjust Switch, and UL Frequency Adjust Value set based on
the frequency offset reported by the BTS.
Step 8 Activate the TA handover algorithm by performing the following steps:
1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with TA HO Allowed set to YES(Yes).
2. Run the SET GCELLHOEMG command with TA Threshold set according to onsite
requirements.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 79


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

3. Run the SET GCELLHOFITPEN command with Penalty Level after TA HO and
Penalty Time after TA HO set according to onsite requirements.

Step 9 Activate the BQ handover algorithm by performing the following steps:


1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with BQ HO Allowed set to YES(Yes).
2. (Optional) For a non-AMR call, run the SET GCELLHOEMG command with DL
Qual. Threshold and UL Qual. Threshold set according to onsite requirements.
3. (Optional) For an AMR FR or AMR HR call, run the SET GCELLAMRQUL
command with UL Qual. Limit for AMR FR, DL Qual. Limit for AMR FR, UL
Qual. Limit for AMR HR, and DL Qual. Limit for AMR HR set according to onsite
requirements.
4. Run the SET GCELLHOFITPEN command with Penalty Level after BQ HO and
Penalty Time after BQ HO set according to onsite requirements.

Step 10 Activate the rapid level drop handover algorithm by performing the following steps:
1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed set to
YES(Yes) and Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold set according to onsite requirements.
2. Run the SET GCELLHOEMG command with the following parameters set according
to onsite requirements: Filter Parameter A1, Filter Parameter A2, Filter Parameter
A3, Filter Parameter A4, Filter Parameter A5, Filter Parameter A6, Filter
Parameter A7, Filter Parameter A8, and Filter Parameter B.

Step 11 Activate the interference handover algorithm by performing the following steps:
1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with its parameters set as follows:
– Set Interference HO Allowed to YES(Yes).
– Set Intracell HO Allowed and Inter-layer HO Threshold according to onsite
requirements.
NOTE

If a cell is configured with external neighboring GSM cells, run the MOD GEXT2GCELL command
with Inter-layer HO Threshold set according to onsite requirements.
2. Run the SET GCELLHOAD command with Forbidden time after MAX Times set
according to onsite requirements.
3. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Index Type, Source Cell Index, Neighbor
2G Cell Index, and Neighboring Cell Type set according to actual conditions. If a
BSC6910 is used, set Is External Cell to an appropriate value.
4. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis
set according to onsite requirements.
5. Run the SET GCELLAMRQUL command with the following parameters set according
to onsite requirements: Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 1 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO
Qual. Thresh 2 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 3 for Non-AMR FR,
Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 4 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 5 for
Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 6 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual.
Thresh 7 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 8 for Non-AMR FR,
Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 9 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 10 for
Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 11 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO
Qual. Thresh 12 for Non-AMR FR, and Interfere HO Qual. Thresh Offset for AMR
FR.

Step 12 Activate the no-DL-MR handover algorithm by performing the following steps:

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 80


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

1. Run the SET GCELLHOEMG command with its parameters set as follows:
– Set No Dl Mr.HO Allowed to YES(Yes).
– Set No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limit, Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit, No Dl Mr.
HO Statistic Time, and No Dl Mr. HO Last Time according to onsite
requirements.
2. Run the SET GCELLHOFITPEN command with Filter Length for TCH Qual and
Filter Length for SDCCH Qual set according to onsite requirements.

Step 13 Activate the enhanced dual-band network handover algorithm by performing the following
steps:
1. Run the MOD GCELL command with its parameters set as follows:
– Set Cell IUO Type to EDB_cell(Enhanced Double Frequency Cell).
– Set Cell Inner/Extra Property and Same Group Cell Index Type according to
onsite requirements.
– Set Same Group Cell Index or Same Group Cell Name to an appropriate value.
2. Run the SET GCELLHOEDBPARA command with the following parameters set
according to onsite requirements: Load HO Allowed, UL Subcell General Overload
Threshold, Inner Cell Serious OverLoad Thred, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control
Level, Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH, Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO,
UL Subcell Load Hierarchical HO Periods, MOD Step LEN of UL Load HO
Period, Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO, UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold,
Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level, Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH, OL
Subcell Load Diversity HO Period, Step Length of OL Subcell Load HO, Distance
Between Boundaries of Subcells, and Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries.

Step 14 Activate the load handover algorithm by performing the following steps:
1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with its parameters set as follows:
– Set Load Handover Support to YES(Yes).
– Set Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold and Inter-layer HO Threshold according
to onsite requirements.
2. Run the SET GCELLHOAD command with the following parameters set according to
onsite requirements: System Flux Threshold for Load HO, Load HO Threshold,
Load handover Load Accept Threshold, Load HO Bandwidth, Load HO Step
Period, and Load HO Step Level.
NOTE

If a cell is configured with external neighboring GSM cells, run the MOD GEXT2GCELL command
with Load handover Load Accept Threshold set according to onsite requirements. If a cell is
configured with external neighboring UMTS cells, run the MOD GEXT3GCELL command with
Load handover Load Accept Threshold set according to onsite requirements.
3. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Index Type, Source Cell Index, Neighbor
2G Cell Index, and Neighboring Cell Type set according to actual conditions. If a
BSC6910 is used, set Is External Cell to an appropriate value.
4. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis
set according to onsite requirements.

Step 15 Activate the edge handover algorithm by performing the following steps:
1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with its parameters set as follows:
– Set Edge HO Allowed to YES(Yes).

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 81


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

– Set Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold,


Handover Algorithm I Edge HO Watch Time, and Handover Algorithm I Edge
HO Valid Time according to onsite requirements.
2. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Index Type, Source Cell Index, Neighbor
2G Cell Index, and Neighboring Cell Type set according to actual conditions. If a
BSC6910 is used, set Is External Cell to an appropriate value.
3. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis
set according to onsite requirements.
4. (Optional) To set different edge handover thresholds for different neighboring GSM
cells, perform the following steps:
5. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with Enhanced Outgoing Cell Handover
Allowed set to YES(Yes).
6. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Index Type, Source Cell Index, Neighbor
2G Cell Index, and Neighboring Cell Type set according to actual conditions. If a
BSC6910 is used, set Is External Cell to an appropriate value.
7. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis
set according to onsite requirements.
Step 16 Activate the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithm by performing the following steps:
1. Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command with Layer of The Cell set according to
onsite requirements.
2. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with MS Fast Moving HO Allowed set to
YES(Yes) and Inter-layer HO Threshold set according to onsite requirements.
3. Run the SET GCELLHOAD command with the following parameters set according to
onsite requirements: MS Fast-moving Watch Cells, MS Fast-moving Valid Cells, MS
Fast-moving Time Threshold, Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO, and Penalty Time
on Fast Moving HO.
NOTE

If a cell is configured with external neighboring GSM cells, run the MOD GEXT2GCELL command
with the following parameters set according to onsite requirements: Layer of the cell, Inter-layer HO
Threshold, Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO, and Penalty on Fast Moving HO.
4. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Index Type, Source Cell Index, Neighbor
2G Cell Index, and Neighboring Cell Type set according to actual conditions. If a
BSC6910 is used, set Is External Cell to an appropriate value.
5. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis
set according to onsite requirements.
Step 17 Activate the inter-layer handover algorithm by performing the following steps:
1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with Level HO Allowed set to YES(Yes)
and Inter-layer HO Threshold set according to onsite requirements.
2. Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command with Layer of The Cell and Cell
Priority set according to onsite requirements.
NOTE

If a cell is configured with external neighboring GSM cells, run the MOD GEXT2GCELL command
with Layer of the cell and Cell Priority set according to onsite requirements.
3. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Index Type, Source Cell Index, Neighbor
2G Cell Index, and Neighboring Cell Type set according to actual conditions. If a
BSC6910 is used, set Is External Cell to an appropriate value.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 82


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

4. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with the following parameters set according to
onsite requirements: Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis, Layer HO Watch
Time, and Layer HO Valid Time.
NOTE

To set different inter-layer handover conditions for different neighboring GSM cells, do as follows:
– Set Neighboring Cell Penalty Switch to YES(Yes).
– Set Penalty Stop Level Threshold, Penalty Timer Length, and Level Penalty
Value on Neighboring Cell according to onsite requirements.

Step 18 Activate the PBGT handover algorithm by performing the following steps:
1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with PBGT HO Allowed set to YES(Yes).
2. Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command with Layer of The Cell and Cell
Priority set according to onsite requirements.
NOTE

If a cell is configured with external neighboring GSM cells, run the MOD GEXT2GCELL command
with Layer of the cell and Cell Priority set according to onsite requirements.
3. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Index Type, Source Cell Index, Neighbor
2G Cell Index, and Neighboring Cell Type set according to actual conditions. If a
BSC6910 is used, set Is External Cell to an appropriate value.
4. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with its parameters set as follows:
– Set Current HO CTRL Algorithm in Source Cell to
HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).
– Set Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis, PBGT Watch Time, and PBGT
Valid Time according to onsite requirements.
NOTE

To set different PBGT handover conditions for different neighboring GSM cells, do as follows:
l Set Neighboring Cell Penalty Switch to YES(Yes).
l Set Penalty Stop Level Threshold, Penalty Timer Length, and Penalty Stop Level Threshold
according to onsite requirements.

Step 19 Activate the AMR handover algorithm by performing the following steps:
1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with its parameters set as follows:
– Set Intracell F-H HO Allowed to YES(Yes).
– Set Intracell F-H HO Stat Time, Intracell F-H HO Last Time, F2H HO
Threshold, and H2F HO Threshold according to onsite requirements.
2. Run the SET GTRXDEV command with TCH Rate Adjust Allow set to YES(Yes).
3. Run the SET GCELLCCACCESS command with at least FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-
rate VER 1), FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3), and
HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3) selected under Speech Version.
4. Run the SET BSCBASIC command with Um Interface Tag, Abis Interface Tag, and
A Interface Tag set to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.
5. Run the SET GCELLCHMGAD command with AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed and
AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold set according to onsite requirements.

Step 20 Activate the capacity- and quality-based TCHF-TCHH handover algorithm by performing the
following steps:

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 83


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with its parameters set as follows:
– Set Intracell F-H HO Allowed to
HOBASECAPANDQUAL(HOBASECAPANDQUAL).
– Set AMR F-H Ho Allowed and Non-AMR F-H Ho Allowed to YES(Yes).
– Set the following parameters according to onsite requirements: Non-AMR F-H
Traffic Threshold, F-H Ho Duration, F-H Ho Period, AMR F-H Ho Pathloss
Adjust Step, AMR F-H Ho ATCB Adjust Step, AMR F-H Ho Pathloss
Threshold, F-H Pathloss Offset Overlay, AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold, F-H
ATCB Offset Overlay, AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold, F-H Ho Stat. Time, F-H
Ho Last Time, AMR H-F Traffic Threshold, H-F Ho Duration, AMR H-F Ho
ATCB Threshold, H-F ATCB Offset Overlay, Non-AMR H-F Ho Pathloss
Threshold, H-F Pathloss Offset Overlay, Non-AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold,
H-F Ho Stat. Time, H-F Ho Last Time, Non-AMR F-H Traffic Threshold, Non-
AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Adjust Step, Non-AMR F-H Ho ATCB Adjust Step,
Non-AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Threshold, Non-AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold,
Non-AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold, Non-AMR H-F Traffic Threshold, Non-
AMR H-F Ho ATCB Threshold, Non-AMR H-F Ho Pathloss Threshold, and
Non-AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold.
2. Run the SET GTRXDEV command with TCH Rate Adjust Allow set to YES(Yes).
3. Run the SET GCELLCCACCESS command with FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate
VER 3) and HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3) selected under Speech Version.
4. Run the SET BSCBASIC command with A Interface Tag set to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.
Step 21 Activate the SDCCH handover algorithm by performing the following steps:
1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with SDCCH HO Allowed set to
YES(Yes).
2. Run the SET GCELLHOCTRL command with Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed set
according to onsite requirements.

----End

MML Command Examples


//Deploying HUAWEI I Handover
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;
SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;
SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;
SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOTRYCNT=3;
//Activating the quick handover algorithm for the BSC6900
MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ISCHAINNCELL=YES,
CHAINNCELLTYPE=QUICK_HO_NCELL_TYPE_A, ADJHOOFFSET=1;

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 84


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, QUICKHOEN=YES, QUICKPBGTHOEN=YES;
SET GCELLHOFAST: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOUPTRIGE=50,
HODOWNTRIGE=50, MOVESPEEDTHRES=35, SCELLFILTER=4, NCELLFILTER=4,
IGNOREMRNUM=1, TIMEPUNISH=10, HOPUNISHVALUE=63, HOOFFSET=68,
MSLEVSTRQPBGT=NO, HODIRFORECASTEN=YES, HODIRSTATIME=3,
HODIRLASTTIME=2, AFCHOSTATTIME=4, AFCHOLASTTIME=3;
SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQADJ=YES, DLFREQADJ=YES,
FREQADJVALUE=36671;
//Activating the quick handover algorithm for the BSC6910
MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
ISNCELL=INNCELL, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ISCHAINNCELL=YES,
CHAINNCELLTYPE=QUICK_HO_NCELL_TYPE_A, ADJHOOFFSET=1;
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, QUICKHOEN=YES, QUICKPBGTHOEN=YES;
SET GCELLHOFAST: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOUPTRIGE=50,
HODOWNTRIGE=50, MOVESPEEDTHRES=35, SCELLFILTER=4, NCELLFILTER=4,
IGNOREMRNUM=1, TIMEPUNISH=10, HOPUNISHVALUE=63, HOOFFSET=68,
MSLEVSTRQPBGT=NO, HODIRFORECASTEN=YES, HODIRSTATIME=3,
HODIRLASTTIME=2, AFCHOSTATTIME=4, AFCHOLASTTIME=3;
SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQADJ=YES, DLFREQADJ=YES,
FREQADJVALUE=36671;
//Activating the TA handover algorithm
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, TAHOEN=YES;
SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, TALIMIT=125;
SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, SSTAPUNISH=40, TIMETAPUNISH=10;

//Activating the BQ handover algorithm


SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, BQHOEN=YES;
SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, DLQUALIMIT=55, ULQUALIMIT=60;
SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, SSBQPUNISH=63, TIMEBQPUNISH=10;
//Activating the rapid level drop handover algorithm
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, RXQCKFALLHOEN=YES, ULEDGETHRES=10;
SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, FLTPARAA1=10, FLTPARAA2=10,

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 85


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

FLTPARAA3=10, FLTPARAA4=10, FLTPARAA5=10, FLTPARAA6=10, FLTPARAA7=10,


FLTPARAA8=10, FLTPARAB=0;

//Activating the interference handover algorithm for the BSC6900


SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, INTRACELLHOEN=YES, INTERFHOEN=YES,
HOTHRES=2;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BANTIME=20;
MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67;
SET GCELLAMRQUL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, RXQUAL1=70, RXQUAL2=60,
RXQUAL3=59, RXQUAL4=58, RXQUAL5=57, RXQUAL6=56, RXQUAL7=55,
RXQUAL8=54, RXQUAL9=53, RXQUAL10=52, RXQUAL11=51, RXQUAL12=50;
//Activating the interference handover algorithm for the BSC6910
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, INTRACELLHOEN=YES, INTERFHOEN=YES,
HOTHRES=2;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BANTIME=20;
MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
ISNCELL=INNCELL, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67;
SET GCELLAMRQUL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, RXQUAL1=70, RXQUAL2=60,
RXQUAL3=59, RXQUAL4=58, RXQUAL5=57, RXQUAL6=56, RXQUAL7=55,
RXQUAL8=54, RXQUAL9=53, RXQUAL10=52, RXQUAL11=51, RXQUAL12=50;

//Activating the no-DL-MR handover algorithm


SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, NODLMRHOEN=YES,
NODLMRHOQUALLIMIT=50, NODLMRHOALLOWLIMIT=8,
NODLMRHOSTATTIME=1, NODLMRHOLASTTIME=1;
SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, DATAQUAFLTLEN=4, SIGQUAFLTLEN=2;

//Activating the enhanced dual-band network handover algorithm


MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IUOTP=EDB_cell, CELLINEXTP=Inner,
DBLFREQADJIDTYPE=BYID, DBLFREQADJCID=1;
SET GCELLHOEDBPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OUTASSOPTEN=YES;
//Activating the load handover algorithm for the BSC6900
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, LoadHoEn=YES, DLEDGETHRES=20,
HOTHRES=25;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SYSFLOWLEV=10, TRIGTHRES=90,
LoadAccThres=80, LOADOFFSET=25, LOADHOPERIOD=10, LOADHOSTEP=5;

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 86


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,


NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67;

//Activating the load handover algorithm for the BSC6910

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, LoadHoEn=YES, DLEDGETHRES=20,
HOTHRES=25;

SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SYSFLOWLEV=10, TRIGTHRES=90,


LoadAccThres=80, LOADOFFSET=25, LOADHOPERIOD=10, LOADHOSTEP=5;

MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,


ISNCELL=INNCELL, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67;

//Activating the edge handover algorithm for the BSC6900

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, FRINGEHOEN=YES, ULEDGETHRES=10,
DLEDGETHRES=20, EDGESTAT1=6, EDGELAST1=4;

MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,


NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67;

//Activating the edge handover algorithm for the BSC6910

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, FRINGEHOEN=YES, ULEDGETHRES=10,
DLEDGETHRES=20, EDGESTAT1=6, EDGELAST1=4;

MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,


ISNCELL=INNCELL, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67;

//Activating the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithm for the BSC6900

SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LAYER=3;

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, QCKMVHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=25;

SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QCKSTATCNT=3, QCKTRUECNT=2,


QCKTIMETH=15, SPEEDPUNISH=30, SPEEDPUNISHT=4;

MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,


NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67;

//Activating the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithm for the BSC6910

SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LAYER=3;

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, QCKMVHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=25;

SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QCKSTATCNT=3, QCKTRUECNT=2,


QCKTIMETH=15, SPEEDPUNISH=30, SPEEDPUNISHT=4;

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 87


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,


ISNCELL=INNCELL, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67;

//Activating the inter-layer handover algorithm for the BSC6900

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, LEVHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=25;

SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LAYER=3, PRIOR=PRIOR-3;

MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,


NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67, LEVSTAT=6, LEVLAST=4;

//Activating the inter-layer handover algorithm for the BSC6910

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, LEVHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=25;

SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LAYER=3, PRIOR=PRIOR-3;

MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,


ISNCELL=INNCELL, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67,
LEVSTAT=6, LEVLAST=4;

//Activating the PBGT handover algorithm for the BSC6900

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, PBGTHOEN=YES;

SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LAYER=3, PRIOR=PRIOR-3;

MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,


NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67, PBGTSTAT=6,
PBGTLAST=4;

MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,


NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
PBGTMARGIN=68, PBGTSTAT=6, PBGTLAST=4;

//Activating the PBGT handover algorithm for the BSC6910

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, PBGTHOEN=YES;

SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LAYER=3, PRIOR=PRIOR-3;

MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,


ISNCELL=INNCELL, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67,
PBGTSTAT=6, PBGTLAST=4;

MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,


ISNCELL=INNCELL, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL,
SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, PBGTMARGIN=68, PBGTSTAT=6,
PBGTLAST=4;

//Activating the AMR handover algorithm

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 88


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, INTRACELLFHHOEN=YES, INFHHOSTAT=10,
INFHHOLAST=8, INHOF2HTH=25, INHOH2FTH=12;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, TCHAJFLAG=YES;
SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-1&FULL_RATE_VER2-0&FULL_RATE_VER3-1&HA
LF_RATE_VER1-1&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-1&FULL_RATE_VER5
-0;
SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus,
AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus;
SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=ON,
AMRTCHHPRIORLOAD=55;

//Activating the capacity- and quality-based TCHF-TCHH handover algorithm


SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=
HOALGORITHM1, INTRACELLFHHOEN=HOBASECAPANDQUAL,
AMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=YES, AMRFULLTOHALFHOTHRESH=75,
FULLTOHALFHODURATION=5, FULLTOHALFHOPERIOD=1,
AMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHADJSTEP=1, AMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBADJSTEP=2,
AMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHTHRESH=100, FULLTOHALFHOPATHOFFSET=10,
AMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBTHRESH=20, FULLTOHALFHOATCBOFFSET=20,
AMRFULLTOHALFHOQUALTHRESH=0, FULLTOHALFHOSTATTIME=6,
FULLTOHALFHOLASTTIME=4, AMRHALFTOFULLHOTHRESH=45,
AMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALALLOW=YES, HALFTOFULLHODURATION=5,
AMRHALFTOFULLHOATCBTHRESH=4, HALFTOFULLATCBOFFSET=20,
AMRHALFTOFULLHOPATHTHRESH=108, HALFTOFULLHOPATHOFFSET=10,
AMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALTHRESH=3, HALFTOFULLHOSTATTIME=6,
HALFTOFULLHOLASTTIME=4, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=YES,
NOAMRFULLTOHALFTHRESH=85, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHADJSTEP=1,
NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBADJSTEP=2,
NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHTHRESH=95,
NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBTHRESH=30,
NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOQUALTHRESH=0, NOAMRHALFTOFULLTHRESH=25,
NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALALLOW=YES,
NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOATCBTHRESH=14,
NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOPATHTHRESH=103,
NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALTHRESH=2;
SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, TCHAJFLAG=YES;
SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-1&FULL_RATE_VER2-0&FULL_RATE_VER3-1&HA
LF_RATE_VER1-1&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-1&FULL_RATE_VER5
-0;
SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2;
//Activating the SDCCH handover algorithm
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=
HOALGORITHM1, SIGCHANHOEN=YES;

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 89


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SET GCELLHOCTRL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INRBSCSDHOEN=YES;

Using the CME


NOTE

When configuring the HUAWEI I Handover feature on the CME, you must perform a single
configuration first, and then perform batch modifications if required.
You must perform a single configuration for a parameter before batch modifications of the parameter.
You are advised to perform batch modifications before logging out of the parameter setting interface.

Step 1 Configure a single object on the CME. (CME single configuration)

Set parameters on the CME configuration interface according to the operation sequence
described in Table 6-2. For the method of performing the CME single configuration, see
CME Single ConfigurationOperation Guide e.

Step 2 (Optional) Modify objects in batches on the CME. (CME batch modification center)

To modify objects, such as BSCs, BTSs, cells, and TRXs, in batches, click the icon on the
CME configuration interface to start the batch modification wizard. For the method of
performing batch modifications through the CME batch modification center, press F1 on the
wizard interface to obtain online help

----End

Table 6-2 Configuring parameters on the CME

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center

1 GCELLHOB BSC6900/ Current HOCTRLSWITCH Yes


ASIC BSC6910 HO
Control
Algorithm

2 GCELLHOE BSC6900/ Current HOCTRLSWITCH Yes


MG BSC6910 HO
Control
Algorithm

3 GCELLHOFI BSC6900/ Current HOCTRLSWITCH Yes


TPEN BSC6910 HO
Control
Algorithm

4 GCELLHOIU BSC6900/ Current HOCTRLSWITCH Yes


O BSC6910 HO
Control
Algorithm

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 90


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center

5 GCELLHOA BSC6900/ Max. HOTRYCNT Yes


D BSC6910 Num. of
HO
Attempts

6 GCELLCCC BSC6900/ PWRC CANPC Yes


H BSC6910
NOTE
Configure this
MO if you
need to
improve the
handover and
power control
performance
when the
BCCH TRX
participates in
baseband
frequency
hopping.

7 GCELLOTH BSC6900/ Power PCHOCMPCON Yes


EXT BSC6910 Control
NOTE and
Configure this Handover
MO if you CMP
need to CON Sw
improve the
handover and
power control
performance
when the
BCCH TRX
participates in
baseband
frequency
hopping.

8 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Index IDTYPE No


NOTE BSC6910 Type
Configure this
MO to Source SRC2GNCELLID
activate the Cell Index
quick
handover Neighbor NBR2GNCELLID
algorithm. 2G Cell
Index

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 91


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center

Neighbori QUERYTYPE
ng Cell
Type

9 G2GNCELL BSC6910 Is ISNCELL No


NOTE External
Configure this Cell
MO to
activate the
quick
handover
algorithm.

10 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Chain ISCHAINNCELL No


NOTE BSC6910 Neighbor
Configure this Cell
MO to
activate the Chain CHAINNCELLTYPE
quick Neighbou
handover r Cell
algorithm. Type

Quick ADJHOOFFSET
Handover
Offset for
Neighbor
Cell

11 GCELLHOB BSC6900/ Quick QUICKHOEN Yes


ASIC BSC6910 Handover
NOTE Enable
Configure this
MO to
activate the
quick
handover
algorithm.

12 GCELLHOB BSC6900/ Quick QUICKPBGTHOEN Yes


ASIC BSC6910 PBGT
NOTE Handover
Configure this Enable
MO to
activate the
quick
handover
algorithm.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 92


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center

13 GCELLHOF BSC6900/ Handover HODIRFORECASTEN Yes


AST BSC6910 Direction
NOTE Forecast
Configure this Enable
MO to
activate the Quick HOUPTRIGE
quick Handover
handover Up
algorithm. Trigger
Level

Quick HODOWNTRIGE
Handover
Down
Trigger
Level

Quick MOVESPEEDTHRES
Move
Speed
Threshold

Serving SCELLFILTER
Cell Filter
Length
MR
Number

Neighbor NCELLFILTER
Cell Filter
Length
MR
Number

Ignore IGNOREMRNUM
Measurem
ent Report
Number

Quick TIMEPUNISH
Handover
Punish
Time

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 93


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center

Quick HOPUNISHVALUE
Handover
Punish
Value

Quick HOOFFSET
Handover
Offset

Handover HODIRSTATIME
Direction
Forecast
Statistic
Times

Handover HODIRLASTTIME
Direction
Forecast
Last
Times

Frequency AFCHOSTATTIME
Shift
Handover
Statistic
Time

Frequency AFCHOLASTTIME
Shift
Handover
Duration

14 GCELLOTH BSC6900/ UL FREQADJ Yes


EXT BSC6910 Frequency
NOTE Adjust
Configure this Switch
MO to
activate the DL DLFREQADJ
quick Frequency
handover Adjust
algorithm. Switch

UL FREQADJVALUE
Frequency
Adjust
Value

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 94


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center

15 GCELLHOB BSC6900/ TA HO TAHOEN Yes


ASIC BSC6910 Allowed
NOTE
Configure this
MO to
activate the
TA handover
algorithm.

16 GCELLHOE BSC6900/ TA TALIMIT Yes


MG BSC6910 Threshold
NOTE
Configure this
MO to
activate the
TA handover
algorithm.

17 GCELLHOFI BSC6900/ Penalty SSTAPUNISH Yes


TPEN BSC6910 Level
NOTE after TA
Configure this HO
MO to
activate the Penalty TIMETAPUNISH
TA handover Time after
algorithm. TA HO

18 GCELLHOB BSC6900/ BQ HO BQHOEN Yes


ASIC BSC6910 Allowed
NOTE
Configure this
MO to
activate the
BQ handover
algorithm.

19 GCELLHOE BSC6900/ DL Qual. DLQUALIMIT Yes


MG BSC6910 Threshold
NOTE
Configure this
UL Qual. ULQUALIMIT
MO to Threshold
activate the
BQ handover
algorithm.

20 GCELLAMR BSC6900/ UL Qual. ULQUALIMITAMRFR Yes


QUL BSC6910 Limit for
AMR FR

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 95


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center
NOTE DL Qual. DLQUALIMITAMRFR
Configure this Limit for
MO to
activate the
AMR FR
BQ handover
algorithm.
UL Qual. ULQUALIMITAMRHR
Limit for
AMR HR

DL Qual. DLQUALIMITAMRHR
Limit for
AMR HR

21 GCELLHOFI BSC6900/ Penalty SSBQPUNISH Yes


TPEN BSC6910 Level
NOTE after BQ
Configure this HO
MO to
activate the Penalty TIMEBQPUNISH
BQ handover Time after
algorithm. BQ HO

22 GCELLHOB BSC6900/ Rx_Level RXQCKFALLHOEN Yes


ASIC BSC6910 _Drop HO
NOTE Allowed
Configure this set to
MO to YES(Yes)
activate the
rapid level Edge HO ULEDGETHRES
drop UL
handover RX_LEV
algorithm.
Threshold

23 GCELLHOE BSC6900/ Filter FLTPARAA1 Yes


MG BSC6910 Parameter
NOTE A1
Configure this
MO to Filter FLTPARAA2
activate the Parameter
rapid level A2
drop
handover Filter FLTPARAA3
algorithm. Parameter
A3

Filter FLTPARAA4
Parameter
A4

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 96


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center

Filter FLTPARAA5
Parameter
A5

Filter FLTPARAA6
Parameter
A6

Filter FLTPARAA7
Parameter
A7

Filter FLTPARAA8
Parameter
A8

Filter FLTPARAB
Parameter
B

24 GCELLHOB BSC6900/ Interferen INTERFHOEN Yes


ASIC BSC6910 ce HO
NOTE Allowed
Configure this
MO to Intracell INTRACELLHOEN
activate the HO
interference Allowed
handover
algorithm. Inter-layer HOTHRES
HO
Threshold

25 GCELLHOA BSC6900/ Forbidden BANTIME Yes


D BSC6910 time after
NOTE MAX
Configure this Times
MO to
activate the
interference
handover
algorithm.

26 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Index IDTYPE No


BSC6910 Type

Source SRC2GNCELLID
Cell Index

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 97


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center
NOTE Neighbor NBR2GNCELLID
Configure this 2G Cell
MO to
activate the
Index
interference
handover
Neighbori QUERYTYPE
algorithm. ng Cell
Type

27 G2GNCELL BSC6910 Is ISNCELL No


NOTE External
Configure this Cell
MO to
activate the
interference
handover
algorithm.

28 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Adjacent INTELEVHOHYST No


NOTE BSC6910 Cell Inter-
Configure this layer HO
MO to Hysteresis
activate the
interference
handover
algorithm.

29 GCELLAMR BSC6900/ Interfere RXQUAL1 Yes


QUL BSC6910 HO Qual.
NOTE Thresh 1
Configure this for Non-
MO to AMR FR
activate the
interference Interfere RXQUAL2
handover HO Qual.
algorithm. Thresh 2
for Non-
AMR FR

Interfere RXQUAL3
HO Qual.
Thresh 3
for Non-
AMR FR

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 98


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center

Interfere RXQUAL4
HO Qual.
Thresh 4
for Non-
AMR FR

Interfere RXQUAL5
HO Qual.
Thresh 5
for Non-
AMR FR

Interfere RXQUAL6
HO Qual.
Thresh 6
for Non-
AMR FR

Interfere RXQUAL7
HO Qual.
Thresh 7
for Non-
AMR FR

Interfere RXQUAL8
HO Qual.
Thresh 8
for Non-
AMR FR

Interfere RXQUAL9
HO Qual.
Thresh 9
for Non-
AMR FR

Interfere RXQUAL10
HO Qual.
Thresh 10
for Non-
AMR FR

Interfere RXQUAL11
HO Qual.
Thresh 11
for Non-
AMR FR

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 99


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center

Interfere RXQUAL12
HO Qual.
Thresh 12
for Non-
AMR FR

Interfere RXLEVOFF
HO Qual.
Thresh
Offset for
AMR FR

30 GCELLHOE BSC6900/ No Dl NODLMRHOEN Yes


MG BSC6910 Mr.HO
NOTE Allowed
Configure this
MO to No Dl NODLMRHOQUALLIMI
activate the Mr.Ul T
no-DL-MR Qual HO
handover Limit
algorithm.
Cons.No NODLMRHOALLOWLI-
Dl Mr.HO MIT
Allowed
Limit

No Dl Mr. NODLMRHOSTATTIME
HO
Statistic
Time

No Dl Mr. NODLMRHOLASTTIME
HO Last
Time

31 GCELLHOFI BSC6900/ Filter DATAQUAFLTLEN Yes


TPEN BSC6910 Length for
NOTE TCH Qual
Configure this and
MO to
activate the Filter SIGQUAFLTLEN
no-DL-MR Length for
handover SDCCH
algorithm. Qual

32 GCELL BSC6900/ Cell IUO IUOTP Yes


BSC6910 Type

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 100


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center
NOTE Cell CELLINEXTP
Configure this Inner/
MO to
activate the
Extra
enhanced Property
dual-band
network Same DBLFREQADJIDTYPE
handover Group
algorithm. Cell Index
Type

Same DBLFREQADJIDTYPE
Group
Cell Index
Type

Same DBLFREQADJCID
Group
Cell Index

Same DBLFREQADJCNAME
Group
Cell
Name

33 GCELLHOE BSC6900/ Load HO OUTLOADHOENABLE Yes


DBPARA BSC6910 Allowed
NOTE
Configure this UL OUTGENOVERLDTHRE
MO to Subcell D
activate the General
enhanced Overload
dual-band Threshold
network
handover Inner Cell INNSERIOVERLDTHRE
algorithm.
Serious D
OverLoad
Thred

Subcell EDBSYSFLOWLEV
HO
Allowed
Flow
Control
Level

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 101


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center

Incoming INTOINNREXLEVTHRE
OL D
Subcell
HO Level
TH

Step OUTLOADHOSTEP
Length of
UL
Subcell
Load HO

UL OUTLOADHOPERIOD
Subcell
Load
Hierarchic
al HO
Periods

MOD OUTLOADHOMODPERI
Step LEN
of UL
Load HO
Period

Step OUTLOADHOSTEP
Length of
UL
Subcell
Load HO

UL OUTLOWLOADTHRED
Subcell
Lower
Load
Threshold

Subcell EDBSYSFLOWLEV
HO
Allowed
Flow
Control
Level

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 102


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center

Outgoing OUTINNREXLEVTHRE
OL D
Subcell
HO Level
TH

OL INNLOADHOPERI
Subcell
Load
Diversity
HO
Period

Step INNLOADHOSTEP
Length of
OL
Subcell
Load HO

Distance ATCBTHRED
Between
Boundarie
s of
Subcells

Distance ATCBHYST
Hysteresis
Between
Boundarie
s

34 GCELLHOB BSC6900/ Load LoadHoEn Yes


ASIC BSC6910 Handover
NOTE Support
Configure this
MO to Edge HO DLEDGETHRES
activate the DL
load handover RX_LEV
algorithm. Threshold

Inter-layer HOTHRES
HO
Threshold

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 103


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center

35 GCELLHOA BSC6900/ System SYSFLOWLEV Yes


D BSC6910 Flux
NOTE Threshold
Configure this for Load
MO to HO
activate the
load handover Load HO TRIGTHRES
algorithm. Threshold

Load LoadAccThres
handover
Load
Accept
Threshold

Load HO LOADOFFSET
Bandwidt
h

Load HO LOADHOPERIOD
Step
Period

Load HO LOADHOSTEP
Step
Level

36 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Index IDTYPE No


NOTE BSC6910 Type
Configure this
MO to Source SRC2GNCELLID
activate the Cell Index
load handover
algorithm. Neighbor NBR2GNCELLID
2G Cell
Index

Neighbori QUERYTYPE
ng Cell
Type

37 G2GNCELL BSC6910 Is ISNCELL No


NOTE External
Configure this Cell
MO to
activate the
load handover
algorithm.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 104


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center

38 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Adjacent INTELEVHOHYST No


NOTE BSC6910 Cell Inter-
Configure this layer HO
MO to Hysteresis
activate the
load handover
algorithm.

39 GCELLHOB BSC6900/ Edge HO FRINGEHOEN


ASIC BSC6910 Allowed
NOTE
Configure this Edge HO ULEDGETHRES
MO to UL
activate the RX_LEV
edge Threshold
handover
algorithm. Edge HO DLEDGETHRES
DL
RX_LEV
Threshold

Handover EDGESTAT1
Algorithm
I Edge
HO Watch
Time

Handover EDGELAST1
Algorithm
I Edge
HO Valid
Time

40 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Index IDTYPE No


NOTE BSC6910 Type
Configure this
MO to Source SRC2GNCELLID
activate the Cell Index
edge
handover Neighbor NBR2GNCELLID
algorithm. 2G Cell
Index

Neighbori QUERYTYPE
ng Cell
Type

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 105


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center

41 G2GNCELL BSC6910 Is ISNCELL No


NOTE External
Configure this Cell
MO to
activate the
edge
handover
algorithm.

42 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Adjacent INTELEVHOHYST No


NOTE BSC6910 Cell Inter-
Configure this layer HO
MO to Hysteresis
activate the
edge
handover
algorithm.

43 GCELLHOB BSC6900/ Enhanced EDOUTHOADEN Yes


ASIC BSC6910 Outgoing
NOTE Cell
Configure this Handover
MO to Allowed
activate the
edge
handover
algorithm.

44 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Index IDTYPE No


NOTE BSC6910 Type
Configure this
MO to Source SRC2GNCELLID
activate the Cell Index
edge
handover Neighbor NBR2GNCELLID
algorithm. 2G Cell
Index

Neighbori QUERYTYPE
ng Cell
Type

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 106


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center

45 G2GNCELL BSC6910 Is ISNCELL No


NOTE External
Configure this Cell
MO to
activate the
edge
handover
algorithm.

46 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Adjacent INTELEVHOHYST No


NOTE BSC6910 Cell Inter-
Configure this layer HO
MO to Hysteresis
activate the
edge
handover
algorithm.

47 GCELLBASI BSC6900/ Layer of LAYER Yes


CPARA BSC6910 The Cell
NOTE
Configure this
MO to
activate the
fast-moving
micro cell
handover
algorithm.

48 GCELLHOB BSC6900/ MS Fast QCKMVHOEN Yes


ASIC BSC6910 Moving
NOTE HO
Configure this Allowed
MO to
activate the Inter-layer HOTHRES
fast-moving HO
micro cell Threshold
handover
algorithm.

49 GCELLHOA BSC6900/ MS Fast- QCKSTATCNT Yes


D BSC6910 moving
NOTE Watch
Configure this Cells
MO to
activate the MS Fast- QCKTRUECNT
fast-moving moving
micro cell Valid
handover
Cells
algorithm.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 107


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center

MS Fast- QCKTIMETH
moving
Time
Threshold

Penalty on SPEEDPUNISH
MS Fast
Moving
HO

Penalty SPEEDPUNISHT
Time on
Fast
Moving
HO

50 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Index IDTYPE No


NOTE BSC6910 Type
Configure this
MO to Source SRC2GNCELLID
activate the Cell Index
fast-moving
micro cell Neighbor NBR2GNCELLID
handover 2G Cell
algorithm. Index

Neighbori QUERYTYPE
ng Cell
Type

51 G2GNCELL BSC6910 Is ISNCELL No


NOTE External
Configure this Cell
MO to
activate the
fast-moving
micro cell
handover
algorithm.

52 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Adjacent INTELEVHOHYST No


NOTE BSC6910 Cell Inter-
Configure this layer HO
MO to Hysteresis
activate the
fast-moving
micro cell
handover
algorithm.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 108


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center

53 GCELLHOB BSC6900/ Level HO LEVHOEN Yes


ASIC BSC6910 Allowed
NOTE
Configure this
Inter-layer HOTHRES
MO to HO
activate the Threshold
inter-layer
handover
algorithm.

54 GCELLBASI BSC6900/ Layer of LAYER Yes


CPARA BSC6910 The Cell
NOTE
Configure this
Cell PRIOR
MO to Priority
activate the
inter-layer
handover
algorithm.

55 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Index IDTYPE No


NOTE BSC6910 Type
Configure this
MO to Source SRC2GNCELLID
activate the Cell Index
inter-layer
handover Neighbor NBR2GNCELLID
algorithm. 2G Cell
Index

Neighbori QUERYTYPE
ng Cell
Type

56 G2GNCELL BSC6910 Is ISNCELL No


NOTE External
Configure this Cell
MO to
activate the
inter-layer
handover
algorithm.

57 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Adjacent INTELEVHOHYST No


BSC6910 Cell Inter-
layer HO
Hysteresis

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 109


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center
NOTE Layer HO LEVSTAT
Configure this Watch
MO to
activate the
Time
inter-layer
handover
Layer HO LEVLAST
algorithm. Valid
Time

58 GCELLHOB BSC6900/ Quick PBGTHOEN Yes


ASIC BSC6910 PBGT
NOTE Handover
Configure this Enable
MO to
activate the
PBGT
handover
algorithm.

59 GCELLBASI BSC6900/ Layer of LAYER Yes


CPARA BSC6910 The Cell
NOTE
Configure this
Cell PRIOR
MO to Priority
activate the
PBGT
handover
algorithm.

60 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Index IDTYPE No


NOTE BSC6910 Type
Configure this
MO to Source SRC2GNCELLID
activate the Cell Index
PBGT
handover Neighbor NBR2GNCELLID
algorithm. 2G Cell
Index

Neighbori QUERYTYPE
ng Cell
Type

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 110


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center

61 G2GNCELL BSC6910 Is ISNCELL No


NOTE External
Configure this Cell
MO to
activate the
PBGT
handover
algorithm.

62 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Current SRCHOCTRLSWITCH No


NOTE BSC6910 HO CTRL
Configure this Algorithm
MO to in Source
activate the Cell
PBGT
handover Adjacent INTELEVHOHYST
algorithm. Cell Inter-
layer HO
Hysteresis

PBGT PBGTSTAT
Watch
Time

PBGT PBGTLAST
Valid
Time

63 GCELLHOB BSC6900/ Intracell INTRACELLFHHOEN Yes


ASIC BSC6910 F-H HO
NOTE Allowed
Configure this
MO to Intracell INFHHOSTAT
activate the F-H HO
AMR Stat Time
handover
algorithm. Intracell INFHHOLAST
F-H HO
Last Time

F2H HO INHOF2HTH
Threshold

H2F HO INHOH2FTH
Threshold

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 111


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center

64 GTRXDEV BSC6900/ TCH Rate TCHAJFLAG Yes


NOTE BSC6910 Adjust
Configure this Allow
MO to
activate the
AMR
handover
algorithm.

65 GCELLCCA BSC6900/ Speech VOICEVER Yes


CCESS BSC6910 Version
NOTE
Configure this
MO to
activate the
AMR
handover
algorithm.

66 BSCBASIC BSC6900/ Um UmVer Yes


NOTE BSC6910 Interface
Configure this Tag
MO to
activate the Abis AbisVer
AMR Interface
handover Tag
algorithm.
A Aver
Interface
Tag

67 GCELLCHM BSC6900/ AMR AMRTCHHPRIORALLO Yes


GAD BSC6910 TCH/H W
NOTE Prior
Configure this Allowed
MO to
activate the AMR AMRTCHHPRIORLOAD
AMR TCH/H
handover Prior Cell
algorithm. Load
Threshold

68 GCELLHOB BSC6900/ Intracell INTRACELLFHHOEN Yes


ASIC BSC6910 F-H HO
Allowed

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 112


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center
NOTE AMR F-H AMRFULLTOHALFHOA
Configure this Ho LLOW
MO to
activate the
Allowed
capacity- and
quality-based
Non- NOAMRFULLTOHALF-
TCHF-TCHH AMR F-H HOALLOW
handover Ho
algorithm. Allowed

Non- NOAMRFULLTOHALF-
AMR F-H THRESH
Traffic
Threshold

F-H Ho FULLTOHALFHODURA
Duration TION

F-H Ho FULLTOHALFHOPER-
Period IOD

AMR F-H AMRFULLTOHALFHO-


Ho PATHADJSTEP
Pathloss
Adjust
Step

AMR F-H AMRFULLTOHALFHOA


Ho ATCB TCBADJSTEP
Adjust
Step

AMR F-H AMRFULLTOHALFHO-


Ho PATHTHRESH
Pathloss
Threshold

F-H FULLTOHALFHOPATH
Pathloss OFFSET
Offset
Overlay

AMR F-H AMRFULLTOHALFHOA


Ho ATCB TCBTHRESH
Threshold

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 113


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center

F-H FULLTOHALFHOATC-
ATCB BOFFSET
Offset
Overlay

AMR F-H AMRFULLTOHALFHO-


Ho Qual. QUALTHRESH
Threshold

F-H Ho FULLTOHALFHOSTAT-
Stat. Time TIME

F-H Ho FULLTOHALFHOLAST-
Last Time TIME

AMR H-F AMRHALFTOFULLHO-


Traffic THRESH
Threshold

H-F Ho HALFTOFULLHODURA
Duration TION

AMR H-F AMRHALFTOFULLHOA


Ho ATCB TCBTHRESH
Threshold

H-F HALFTOFULLATCBOF
ATCB FSET
Offset
Overlay

Non- NOAMRHALFTOFULL-
AMR H-F HOPATHTHRESH
Ho
Pathloss
Threshold

H-F HALFTOFULLHOPATH
Pathloss OFFSET
Offset
Overlay

Non- NOAMRHALFTOFULL-
AMR H-F HOQUALTHRESH
Ho Qual.
Threshold

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 114


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center

H-F Ho HALFTOFULLHOSTAT-
Stat. Time TIME

H-F Ho HALFTOFULLHOLAST-
Last Time TIME

Non- NOAMRFULLTOHALF-
AMR F-H THRESH
Traffic
Threshold

Non- NOAMRFULLTOHALF-
AMR F-H HOPATHADJSTEP
Ho
Pathloss
Adjust
Step

Non- NOAMRFULLTOHALF-
AMR F-H HOATCBADJSTEP
Ho ATCB
Adjust
Step

Non- NOAMRFULLTOHALF-
AMR F-H HOPATHTHRESH
Ho
Pathloss
Threshold

Non- NOAMRFULLTOHALF-
AMR F-H HOATCBTHRESH
Ho ATCB
Threshold

Non- NOAMRFULLTOHALF-
AMR F-H HOQUALTHRESH
Ho Qual.
Threshold

Non- NOAMRHALFTOFULL-
AMR H-F THRESH
Traffic
Threshold

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 115


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center

Non- NOAMRHALFTOFULL-
AMR H-F HOATCBTHRESH
Ho ATCB
Threshold

Non- NOAMRHALFTOFULL-
AMR H-F HOPATHTHRESH
Ho
Pathloss
Threshold

Non- NOAMRHALFTOFULL-
AMR H-F HOQUALTHRESH
Ho Qual.
Threshold

69 GTRXDEV BSC6900/ TCH Rate TCHAJFLAG Yes


NOTE BSC6910 Adjust
Configure this Allow
MO to
activate the
capacity- and
quality-based
TCHF-TCHH
handover
algorithm.

70 GCELLCCA BSC6900/ Speech VOICEVER Yes


CCESS BSC6910 Version
NOTE
Configure this
MO to
activate the
capacity- and
quality-based
TCHF-TCHH
handover
algorithm.

71 BSCBASIC BSC6900/ A Aver Yes


NOTE BSC6910 Interface
Configure this Tag
MO to
activate the
capacity- and
quality-based
TCHF-TCHH
handover
algorithm.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 116


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN Managed NE Paramete Parameter ID Config


Object r Name urable
(MO) in CME
Batch
Modifi
cation
Center

72 GCELLHOB BSC6900/ SDCCH SIGCHANHOEN Yes


ASIC BSC6910 HO
NOTE Allowed
Configure this
MO to
activate the
SDCCH
handover
algorithm.

73 GCELLHOC BSC6900/ Inter-BSC INRBSCSDHOEN Yes


TRL BSC6910 SDCCH
NOTE HO
Configure this ALLowed
MO to
activate the
SDCCH
handover
algorithm.

6.4.4 Activation Observation


On the BSC LMT, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Run the LST GCELLHOBASIC command to query the value of Current HO Control
Algorithm.

Expected result: The value of Current HO Control Algorithm is Handover algorithm I.

Step 2 Trace BSSAP messages over the A interface.

Expected result: The BSC sends a Handover Performed message to the MSC.

The cause value contained in the Handover Performed message varies depending on the
handover type. The following table lists the cause value for each handover type.

Handover Type Cause Value

Quick handover better-cell

TA handover distance

BQ handover uplink-quality or downlink-quality

Rapid level drop handover uplink-strength

Interference handover uplink-quality or downlink-quality

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 117


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

Handover Type Cause Value

Handover due to no downlink measurement uplink-quality


report

Enhanced dual-band network handover better-cell or traffic

Load handover traffic

Edge handover uplink-strength or downlink-strength

Fast-moving micro cell handover better-cell

Inter-layer handover better-cell

PBGT handover better-cell

Capacity- and quality-based TCHF-TCHH uplink-quality


handover

Capacity- and quality-based TCHH-TCHF traffic


handover

SDCCH handover better-cell, distance, uplink-quality,


downlink-quality, traffic, uplink-strength, or
downlink-strength

----End

6.4.5 Deactivation
The HUAWEI I Handover feature does not need to be deactivated.

6.5 Deploying HUAWEI II Handover and AMR FR/HR


Dynamic Adjustment

6.5.1 Deployment Requirements


Table 6-3 Deployment requirements
Aspect Requirement

Related features See 4 Related Features.

BSC None

BTS None

GSM networking None

MS None

MSC None

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 118


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

Aspect Requirement

License The license controlling this feature has been


activated. For details on how to activate the
license, see License Management Feature
Parameter Description. For details about
license items, see License Control Item
Description.

Others None

6.5.2 Precautions
l After a quick handover, BQ handover, or TA handover is complete, a handover penalty is
imposed on the original cell during the specified penalty period to prevent an immediate
handover back to the original cell.
l In the Huawei II handover algorithm, do not select the serving cell as the target cell for a
BQ handover.
l If TA Threshold for a co-site neighboring cell is lower than or equal to that for the
serving cell, a TA handover to the neighboring cell is not allowed.
l The interference handover can be an intra-cell handover. However, if intra-cell
handovers have occurred several consecutive times, an intra-cell handover is prohibited
within a specified period. In the Huawei II handover algorithm, always select the serving
cell as the target cell for an interference handover.
l On an enhanced dual-band network, an MS cannot be handed over to a cell in the same
group when overlaid/underlaid load handovers, specified by Load HO From UL
Subcell to OL Subcell Allowed and Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell Enabled,
respectively, are allowed. This prevents conflicts between a load handover on a common
network and an overlaid/underlaid handover on an enhanced dual-band network.
l A PBGT handover to a cell in the same group is not allowed if it is triggered between
two cells on an enhanced dual-band handover.
l After a fast-moving micro cell handover is complete, a handover penalty is imposed on
all neighboring micro cells.
l The decision on a load handover is not made independently. Instead, it is made during
network adjustment. However, the decision on a load handover is made when the
decision on a better-cell handover is made. That is, a load handover is triggered only
when the conditions for triggering both a load handover and a better-cell handover are
met.
l The better-cell handover is unique to the Huawei II handover algorithm. It is an
optimization of the inter-layer handover and PBGT handover in the Huawei I handover
algorithm.

6.5.3 Activation

Using MML Commands


On the BSC LMT, perform the following steps:

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 119


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

Step 1 Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with Current HO Control Algorithm set to
HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II).

Step 2 Run the SET GCELLHOEMG command with Current HO Control Algorithm set to
HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II).

Step 3 Run the SET GCELLHOFITPEN command with Current HO Control Algorithm set to
HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II).

Step 4 Run the SET GCELLHOIUO command with Current HO Control Algorithm set to
HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II).

Step 5 Run the SET GCELLHOAD command with Max. Num. of HO Attempts set according to
onsite requirements.

Step 6 (Optional) To improve the handover and power control performance when the BCCH TRX
participates in baseband frequency hopping, run the SET GCELLCCCH command with
PWRC set to YES(Yes) and run the SET GCELLOTHEXT command with Power Control
and Handover CMP CON Sw set to YES(Yes).

Step 7 Activate the quick handover algorithm by performing the following steps:
1. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Index Type, Source Cell Index, Neighbor
2G Cell Index, and Neighboring Cell Type set according to actual conditions. If a
BSC6910 is used, set Is External Cell to an appropriate value.
2. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with its parameters set as follows:
– Set Chain Neighbor Cell to YES(Yes).
– Set Chain Neighbour Cell Type and Quick Handover Offset for Neighbor Cell
according to onsite requirements.
3. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with Quick Handover Enable set to
YES(Yes). If a fast move handover is required, set Quick PBGT Handover Enable to
YES(Yes).
NOTE

Quick handovers consist of fast move handovers and frequency offset handovers. Quick Handover
Enable controls whether to allow fast move handovers and frequency offset handovers. Quick PBGT
Handover Enable further controls whether to allow fast move handovers.
To enable the BSC to accurately make handover decisions, you are advised to set Quick PBGT
Handover Enabled to YES(Yes) in high-speed railway scenarios or chain cells along the highway. In
other scenarios, set Quick PBGT Handover Enabled to NO(No).
4. Run the SET GCELLHOFAST command with the following parameters set according
to onsite requirements: Quick Move Speed Threshold, Quick Handover Up Trigger
Level, Quick Handover Down Trigger Level, Quick Handover Offset, Quick
Handover Punish Time, Quick Handover Punish Value, Serving Cell Filter Length
MR Number, Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number, Ignore Measurement
Report Number, EN Quick PBGT HO ALG When MS Leaves BTS, Handover
Direction Forecast Enable, Handover Direction Forecast Statistic Times, Frequency
Shift Handover Statistic Time, Frequency Shift Handover Duration and Fast
Handover Punish Control Switch.
NOTE

If a cell is configured with external neighboring GSM cells, run the MOD GEXT2GCELL command
with Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish Time, and Quick Handover Punish Value
set to appropriate values.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 120


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

5. Run the SET GCELLOTHEXT command to set extended parameters of a cell. In this
step, set UL Frequency Adjust Switch, DL Frequency Adjust Switch, and UL
Frequency Adjust Value based on the frequency offset reported by the BTS.
Step 8 Activate the TA handover algorithm by performing the following steps:
1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with TA HO Allowed set to YES(Yes).
2. Run the SET GCELLHOEMG command with TA Threshold set according to onsite
requirements.
3. Run the SET GCELLHOFITPEN command with Penalty Level after TA HO and
Penalty Time after TA HO set according to onsite requirements.
4. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Index Type, Source Cell Index, Neighbor
2G Cell Index, and Neighboring Cell Type set according to actual conditions. If a
BSC6910 is used, set Is External Cell to an appropriate value.
5. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with TA HO Watch Time and TA HO Valid
Time set according to onsite requirements.
Step 9 Activate the BQ handover algorithm by performing the following steps:
1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with BQ HO Allowed set to YES(Yes).
2. (Optional) For a non-AMR call, run the SET GCELLHOEMG command with DL
Qual. Threshold and UL Qual. Threshold set according to onsite requirements.
3. (Optional) For an AMR FR or AMR HR call, run the SET GCELLAMRQUL
command with UL Qual. Limit for AMR FR, DL Qual. Limit for AMR FR, UL
Qual. Limit for AMR HR, and DL Qual. Limit for AMR HR set according to onsite
requirements.
4. Run the SET GCELLHOFITPEN command with Penalty Level after BQ HO and
Penalty Time after BQ HO set according to onsite requirements.
5. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Index Type, Source Cell Index, Neighbor
2G Cell Index, and Neighboring Cell Type set according to actual conditions. If a
BSC6910 is used, set Is External Cell to an appropriate value.
6. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with BQ HO Watch Time and BQ HO Valid
Time set according to onsite requirements.
Step 10 Activate the interference handover algorithm by performing the following steps:
1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with its parameters set as follows:
– Set both Interference HO Allowed and Intracell HO Allowed to YES(Yes).
– Set Inter-layer HO Threshold, Interfere HO Static Time, and Interfere HO
Valid Time according to onsite requirements.
NOTE

If a cell is configured with external neighboring GSM cells, run the MOD GEXT2GCELL command
with Inter-layer HO Threshold set according to onsite requirements.
2. Run the SET GCELLHOAD command with Forbidden time after MAX Times,
MAX Consecutive HO Times, and Interval for Consecutive HO Jud. set according to
onsite requirements.
3. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Index Type, Source Cell Index, Neighbor
2G Cell Index, and Neighboring Cell Type set according to actual conditions. If a
BSC6910 is used, set Is External Cell to an appropriate value.
4. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis
set according to onsite requirements.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 121


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

5. Run the SET GCELLAMRQUL command with the following parameters set according
to onsite requirements: Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 1 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO
Qual. Thresh 2 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 3 for Non-AMR FR,
Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 4 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 5 for
Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 6 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual.
Thresh 7 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 8 for Non-AMR FR,
Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 9 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 10 for
Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 11 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO
Qual. Thresh 12 for Non-AMR FR, and Interfere HO Qual. Thresh Offset for AMR
FR.
Step 11 Activate the no-DL-MR handover algorithm by performing the following steps:
1. Run the SET GCELLHOEMG command with its parameters set as follows:
– Set No Dl Mr.HO Allowed to YES(Yes).
– Set UL Qual. Threshold, Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit, No Dl Mr. HO
Statistic Time, and No Dl Mr. HO Last Time according to onsite requirements.
2. Run the SET GCELLAMRQUL command with UL Qual. Limit for AMR FR and
UL Qual. Limit for AMR HR set according to onsite requirements.
3. Run the SET GCELLHOFITPEN command with Filter Length for TCH Qual and
Filter Length for SDCCH Qual set according to onsite requirements.
4. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Index Type, Source Cell Index, Neighbor
2G Cell Index, and Neighboring Cell Type set according to actual conditions. If a
BSC6910 is used, set Is External Cell to an appropriate value.
5. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with UL BQ HO Static Time and UL BQ HO
Last Time set according to onsite requirements.
Step 12 Activate the enhanced dual-band network handover algorithm by performing the following
steps:
1. Run the MOD GCELL command with its parameters set as follows:
– Set Cell IUO Type to EDB_cell(Enhanced Double Frequency Cell).
– Set Cell Inner/Extra Property and Same Group Cell Index Type according to
onsite requirements.
– Set Same Group Cell Index or Same Group Cell Name to an appropriate value.
2. Run the SET GCELLHOEDBPARA command with the following parameters set
according to onsite requirements: Load HO Allowed, UL Subcell General Overload
Threshold, Inner Cell Serious OverLoad Thred, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control
Level, Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH, UL Subcell Serious Overload
Threshold, UL Subcell Load Hierarchical HO Periods, MOD Step LEN of UL Load
HO Period, Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO, UL Subcell Lower Load
Threshold, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level, Outgoing OL Subcell HO
Level TH, OL Subcell Load Diversity HO Period, Step Length of OL Subcell Load
HO, Distance Between Boundaries of Subcells, and Distance Hysteresis Between
Boundaries.
Step 13 Activate the edge handover algorithm by performing the following steps:
1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with its parameters set as follows:
– Set Edge HO Allowed to YES(Yes).
– Set Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold,
Handover Algorithm II Edge HO Watch Time, and Handover Algorithm II
Edge HO Valid Time according to onsite requirements.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 122


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

2. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Index Type, Source Cell Index, Neighbor
2G Cell Index, and Neighboring Cell Type set according to actual conditions. If a
BSC6910 is used, set Is External Cell to an appropriate value.
3. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with the following parameters set according to
onsite requirements: Inter-cell HO Hysteresis, Edge HO AdjCell Watch Time, and
Edge HO AdjCell Valid Time.
4. (Optional) To set different edge handover thresholds for different neighboring GSM
cells, perform the following steps:
5. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with Enhanced Outgoing Cell Handover
Allowed set to YES(Yes).
6. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Index Type, Source Cell Index, Neighbor
2G Cell Index, and Neighboring Cell Type set according to actual conditions. If a
BSC6910 is used, set Is External Cell to an appropriate value.
7. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Enhanced Outgoing Cell Handover
Offset set according to onsite requirements.

Step 14 Activate the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithm by performing the following steps:
1. Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command with Layer of The Cell set according to
actual conditions.
NOTE

If a cell is configured with external neighboring GSM cells, run the MOD GEXT2GCELL
command with Layer of the cell set according to actual conditions.
2. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with MS Fast Moving HO Allowed set to
YES(Yes) and Inter-layer HO Threshold set according to onsite requirements.
NOTE

If a cell is configured with external neighboring GSM cells, run the MOD GEXT2GCELL command
with Inter-layer HO Threshold set according to onsite requirements.
3. Run the SET GCELLHOAD command with the following parameters set according to
onsite requirements: MS Fast-moving Watch Cells, MS Fast-moving Valid Cells, MS
Fast-moving Time Threshold, Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO, and Penalty Time
on Fast Moving HO.
NOTE

If a cell is configured with external neighboring GSM cells, run the MOD GEXT2GCELL command
with Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO and Penalty on Fast Moving HO set to appropriate values.
4. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Index Type, Source Cell Index, Neighbor
2G Cell Index, and Neighboring Cell Type set according to actual conditions. If a
BSC6910 is used, set Is External Cell to an appropriate value.
5. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with the following parameters set according to
onsite requirements: Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis, HCS HO Watch Time,
and HCS HO Valid Time.

Step 15 Activate the better-cell handover algorithm by performing the following steps:
1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with Better Cell Handover Enable set to
YES(Yes) and Pathloss Ho. Enable set according to onsite requirements.
2. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Index Type, Source Cell Index, Neighbor
2G Cell Index, and Neighboring Cell Type set according to actual conditions. If a
BSC6910 is used, set Is External Cell to an appropriate value.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 123


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

3. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Better Cell HO Watch Time and Better
Cell HO Valid Time set according to onsite requirements.
4. (Optional) To set different better-cell handover conditions for different neighboring GSM
cells, perform the following steps:
5. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with Enhanced Outgoing Cell Handover
Allowed set to YES(Yes).
6. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Index Type, Source Cell Index, Neighbor
2G Cell Index, and Neighboring Cell Type set according to actual conditions. If a
BSC6910 is used, set Is External Cell to an appropriate value.
7. Run the MOD G2GNCELL command with its parameters set as follows for different
neighboring GSM cells:
– Set Neighboring Cell Penalty Switch to YES(Yes).
– Set Enhanced Outgoing Cell Handover Offset, Penalty Stop Level Threshold,
Penalty Timer Length, and Level Penalty Value on Neighboring Cell according
to onsite requirements.
Step 16 (Optional) Activate the load handover penalty inheritance algorithm by performing the
following steps:
1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with Load Handover Support set to
YES(Yes).
2. Run the SET GCELLHOFITPEN command with Load HO Penalty Optimization set
to ON(On).
Step 17 (Optional) Activate the TCHF-TCHH handover optimization algorithm by performing the
following steps:
1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with F-H HO Load Band Optimization
Allowed set to ON(On).
2. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with TCHF-TCHH HO Load Hysteresis
set according to onsite requirements.
3. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with the following parameters set according
to onsite requirements to ensure that the TCHF-TCHH handover quality threshold ranges
from 0 to 70: AMR F-H HO Quality Thres. Fine Tune, Non-AMR F-H HO Quality
Thres. Fine Tune, AMR H-F HO Quality Thres. Fine Tune, Non-AMR H-F HO
Quality Thres. Fine Tune, AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold, AMR H-F Ho Qual.
Threshold, Non-AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold, and Non-AMR H-F Ho Qual.
Threshold.
4. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with the following parameters set according
to onsite requirements to ensure that the TCHF-TCHH handover ATCB threshold ranges
from –63 to 255: AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold, AMR H-F Ho ATCB Threshold,
Non-AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold, and Non-AMR H-F Ho ATCB Threshold.
Step 18 Activate the TCHF-TCHH handover algorithm by performing the following steps:
1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with its parameters set as follows:
– Set AMR F-H Ho Allowed, Allow AMR H-F Quality-based HO, Non-AMR F-
H Ho Allowed, and Allow Non-AMR H-F Quality-based HO to YES(Yes).
– Set the following parameters according to onsite requirements: Non-AMR F-H
Traffic Threshold, F-H Ho Duration, F-H Ho Period, AMR F-H Ho Pathloss
Adjust Step, AMR F-H Ho ATCB Adjust Step, AMR F-H Ho Pathloss
Threshold, F-H Pathloss Offset Overlay, AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold, F-H

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 124


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

ATCB Offset Overlay, AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold, F-H Ho Stat. Time, F-H
Ho Last Time, AMR H-F Traffic Threshold, H-F Ho Duration, AMR H-F Ho
ATCB Threshold, H-F ATCB Offset Overlay, Non-AMR H-F Ho Pathloss
Threshold, H-F Pathloss Offset Overlay, Non-AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold,
H-F Ho Stat. Time, H-F Ho Last Time, Non-AMR F-H Traffic Threshold, Non-
AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Adjust Step, Non-AMR F-H Ho ATCB Adjust Step,
Non-AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Threshold, Non-AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold,
Non-AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold, Non-AMR H-F Traffic Threshold, Non-
AMR H-F Ho ATCB Threshold, Non-AMR H-F Ho Pathloss Threshold, and
Non-AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold.
2. Run the SET GTRXDEV command with TCH Rate Adjust Allow set to YES(Yes).
3. Run the SET GCELLCCACCESS command with at least FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-
rate VER 1), FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3), and
HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3) selected under Speech Version.
4. Run the SET BSCBASIC command with A Interface Tag, Um Interface Tag, and
Abis Interface Tag set to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.
Step 19 Activate the SDCCH handover algorithm by performing the following steps:
1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with SDCCH HO Allowed set to YES(Yes).
2. Run the SET GCELLHOCTRL command with Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed set
according to onsite requirements.

----End

MML Command Examples


//Activating HUAWEI II Handover
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2;
SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2;
SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2;
SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOTRYCNT=3;
//Activating the quick handover algorithm for the BSC6900
MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ISCHAINNCELL=YES,
CHAINNCELLTYPE=QUICK_HO_NCELL_TYPE_A, ADJHOOFFSET=1;
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, QUICKHOEN=YES, QUICKPBGTHOEN=YES;
SET GCELLHOFAST: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOUPTRIGE=50,
HODOWNTRIGE=50, MOVESPEEDTHRES=35, SCELLFILTER=4, NCELLFILTER=4,
IGNOREMRNUM=1, TIMEPUNISH=10, HOPUNISHVALUE=63, HOOFFSET=68,
MSLEVSTRQPBGT=NO, HODIRFORECASTEN=YES, HODIRSTATIME=3,
HODIRLASTTIME=2, AFCHOSTATTIME=4, AFCHOLASTTIME=3;

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 125


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQADJ=YES, DLFREQADJ=YES,


FREQADJVALUE=36671;

//Activating the quick handover algorithm for the BSC6910

MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,


ISNCELL=INNCELL, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ISCHAINNCELL=YES,
CHAINNCELLTYPE=QUICK_HO_NCELL_TYPE_A, ADJHOOFFSET=1;

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, QUICKHOEN=YES, QUICKPBGTHOEN=YES;

SET GCELLHOFAST: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOUPTRIGE=50,


HODOWNTRIGE=50, MOVESPEEDTHRES=35, SCELLFILTER=4, NCELLFILTER=4,
IGNOREMRNUM=1, TIMEPUNISH=10, HOPUNISHVALUE=63, HOOFFSET=68,
MSLEVSTRQPBGT=NO, HODIRFORECASTEN=YES, HODIRSTATIME=3,
HODIRLASTTIME=2, AFCHOSTATTIME=4, AFCHOLASTTIME=3;

SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQADJ=YES, DLFREQADJ=YES,


FREQADJVALUE=36671;

//Activating the TA handover algorithm for the BSC6900

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, TAHOEN=YES;

SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, TALIMIT=125;

SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, SSTAPUNISH=40, TIMETAPUNISH=10;

MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,


NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, TASTATTIME=1, TALASTTIME=1;

//Activating the TA handover algorithm for the BSC6910

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, TAHOEN=YES;

SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, TALIMIT=125;

SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, SSTAPUNISH=40, TIMETAPUNISH=10;

MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,


ISNCELL=INNCELL, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, TASTATTIME=1,
TALASTTIME=1;

//Activating the BQ handover algorithm for the BSC6900

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, BQHOEN=YES;

SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, DLQUALIMIT=55, ULQUALIMIT=60;

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 126


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, SSBQPUNISH=63, TIMEBQPUNISH=10;

MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,


NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, BQSTATTIME=1, BQLASTTIME=1;

//Activating the BQ handover algorithm for the BSC6910

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, BQHOEN=YES;

SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, DLQUALIMIT=55, ULQUALIMIT=60;

SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, SSBQPUNISH=63, TIMEBQPUNISH=10;

MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,


ISNCELL=INNCELL, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, BQSTATTIME=1,
BQLASTTIME=1;

//Activating the interference handover algorithm for the BSC6900

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, INTRACELLHOEN=YES, INTERFHOEN=YES,
HOTHRES=25, INTERFERESTATTIME=3, INTERFERELASTTIME=2;

SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BANTIME=20;

MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,


NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67;

SET GCELLAMRQUL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, RXQUAL1=70, RXQUAL2=60,


RXQUAL3=59, RXQUAL4=58, RXQUAL5=57, RXQUAL6=56, RXQUAL7=55,
RXQUAL8=54, RXQUAL9=53, RXQUAL10=52, RXQUAL11=51, RXQUAL12=50;

//Activating the interference handover algorithm for the BSC6910

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, INTRACELLHOEN=YES, INTERFHOEN=YES,
HOTHRES=25, INTERFERESTATTIME=3, INTERFERELASTTIME=2;

SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BANTIME=20;

MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,


ISNCELL=INNCELL, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67;

SET GCELLAMRQUL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, RXQUAL1=70, RXQUAL2=60,


RXQUAL3=59, RXQUAL4=58, RXQUAL5=57, RXQUAL6=56, RXQUAL7=55,
RXQUAL8=54, RXQUAL9=53, RXQUAL10=52, RXQUAL11=51, RXQUAL12=50;

//Activating the no-DL-MR handover algorithm for the BSC6900

SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, NODLMRHOEN=YES,
NODLMRHOQUALLIMIT=50, NODLMRHOALLOWLIMIT=8,
NODLMRHOSTATTIME=1, NODLMRHOLASTTIME=1;

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 127


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, DATAQUAFLTLEN=4, SIGQUAFLTLEN=2;
MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ULBQSTATTIME=1, ULBQLASTTIME=1;

//Activating the no-DL-MR handover algorithm for the BSC6910


SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, NODLMRHOEN=YES,
NODLMRHOQUALLIMIT=50, NODLMRHOALLOWLIMIT=8,
NODLMRHOSTATTIME=1, NODLMRHOLASTTIME=1;
SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, DATAQUAFLTLEN=4, SIGQUAFLTLEN=2;
MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
ISNCELL=INNCELL, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ULBQSTATTIME=1,
ULBQLASTTIME=1;

//Activating the enhanced dual-band network handover algorithm


MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IUOTP=EDB_cell, CELLINEXTP=Inner,
DBLFREQADJIDTYPE=BYID, DBLFREQADJCID=1;
SET GCELLHOEDBPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OUTASSOPTEN=YES;
//Activating the edge handover algorithm for the BSC6900
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, FRINGEHOEN=YES, ULEDGETHRES=10,
DLEDGETHRES=20, EDGESTAT1=6, EDGELAST1=4;
MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67;

//Activating the edge handover algorithm for the BSC6910


SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, FRINGEHOEN=YES, ULEDGETHRES=10,
DLEDGETHRES=20, EDGESTAT1=6, EDGELAST1=4;
MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
ISNCELL=INNCELL, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67;

//Activating the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithm for the BSC6900
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LAYER=3;
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, QCKMVHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=25;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QCKSTATCNT=3, QCKTRUECNT=2,
QCKTIMETH=15, SPEEDPUNISH=30, SPEEDPUNISHT=4;
MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2,
INTELEVHOHYST=67, HCSSTATTIME=3, HCSLASTTIME=2;

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 128


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

//Activating the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithm for the BSC6910
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LAYER=3;
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, QCKMVHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=25;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QCKSTATCNT=3, QCKTRUECNT=2,
QCKTIMETH=15, SPEEDPUNISH=30, SPEEDPUNISHT=4;
MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
ISNCELL=INNCELL, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL,
SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, INTELEVHOHYST=67, HCSSTATTIME=3,
HCSLASTTIME=2;

//Activating the better-cell handover algorithm for the BSC6900


SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, BETTERCELLHOEN=YES,
PATHLOSSHOEN=YES;
MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2,
BETTERCELLSTATTIME=6, BETTERCELLLASTTIME=4;

//Activating the better-cell handover algorithm for the BSC6910


SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, BETTERCELLHOEN=YES,
PATHLOSSHOEN=YES;
MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
ISNCELL=INNCELL, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL,
SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, BETTERCELLSTATTIME=6,
BETTERCELLLASTTIME=4;

//Activating the TCHF-TCHH handover algorithm


SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, AMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=YES,
AMRFULLTOHALFHOTHRESH=75, FULLTOHALFHODURATION=5,
FULLTOHALFHOPERIOD=1, AMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHADJSTEP=1,
AMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBADJSTEP=2, AMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHTHRESH=100,
FULLTOHALFHOPATHOFFSET=10, AMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBTHRESH=20,
FULLTOHALFHOATCBOFFSET=20, AMRFULLTOHALFHOQUALTHRESH=0,
FULLTOHALFHOSTATTIME=6, FULLTOHALFHOLASTTIME=4,
AMRHALFTOFULLHOTHRESH=45, AMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALALLOW=YES,
HALFTOFULLHODURATION=5, AMRHALFTOFULLHOATCBTHRESH=4,
HALFTOFULLATCBOFFSET=20, AMRHALFTOFULLHOPATHTHRESH=108,
HALFTOFULLHOPATHOFFSET=10, AMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALTHRESH=3,
HALFTOFULLHOSTATTIME=6, HALFTOFULLHOLASTTIME=4,
NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=YES, NOAMRFULLTOHALFTHRESH=85,
NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHADJSTEP=1,
NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBADJSTEP=2,
NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHTHRESH=95,

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 129


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBTHRESH=30,
NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOQUALTHRESH=0, NOAMRHALFTOFULLTHRESH=25,
NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALALLOW=YES,
NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOATCBTHRESH=14,
NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOPATHTHRESH=103,
NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALTHRESH=2;

SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, TCHAJFLAG=YES;

SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-1&FULL_RATE_VER2-0&FULL_RATE_VER3-1&HA
LF_RATE_VER1-1&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-1&FULL_RATE_VER5
-0;

SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus,


AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus;

//Activating the load handover penalty inheritance algorithm

SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, LoadHoPunishInheritSwitch=ON;

//Activating the TCHF-TCHH handover optimization algorithm

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, F2HHOLOADSTFSWITCH=ON;

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, AMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBTHRESH=-63,
AMRFULLTOHALFHOQUALTHRESH=6, AMRF2HHOQUALTHFINE=8;

//Activating the SDCCH handover algorithm

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, SIGCHANHOEN=YES;

SET GCELLHOCTRL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INRBSCSDHOEN=YES;

Using the CME


NOTE

You must perform a single configuration for a parameter before batch modifications of the parameter.
You are advised to perform batch modifications before logging out of the parameter setting interface.
When configuring the HUAWEI II Handover and AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment features on the
CME, you must perform a single configuration first, and then perform batch modifications if required.

Step 1 Configure a single object on the CME. (CME single configuration)

Set parameters on the CME configuration interface according to the operation sequence
described in Table 6-4. For the method of performing the CME single configuration, see
CME Single ConfigurationOperation Guide e.

Step 2 (Optional) Modify objects in batches on the CME. (CME batch modification center)

To modify objects, such as BSCs, BTSs, cells, and TRXs, in batches, click the icon on the
CME configuration interface to start the batch modification wizard. For the method of

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 130


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

performing batch modifications through the CME batch modification center, press F1 on the
wizard interface to obtain online help.

----End

Table 6-4 Configuring parameters on the CME


SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports
Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center

1 GCELLHO BSC6900/ Current HO HOCTRLS Yes


BASIC BSC6910 Control WITCH
Algorithm

2 GCELLHO BSC6900/ Current HO HOCTRLS Yes


EMG BSC6910 Control WITCH
Algorithm

3 GCELLHOF BSC6900/ Current HO HOCTRLS Yes


ITPEN BSC6910 Control WITCH
Algorithm

4 GCELLHOI BSC6900/ Current HO HOCTRLS Yes


UO BSC6910 Control WITCH
Algorithm

5 GCELLHO BSC6900/ Max. Num. HOTRYCN Yes


AD BSC6910 of HO T
Attempts

6 GCELLCCC BSC6900/ PWRC CANPC Yes


H BSC6910
NOTE
Configure
this MO if
you need to
improve the
handover
and power
control
performance
when the
BCCH TRX
participates
in baseband
frequency
hopping.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 131


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports


Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center

7 GCELLOT BSC6900/ Power PCHOCMP Yes


HEXT BSC6910 Control and CON
NOTE Handover
Configure CMP CON
this MO if Sw
you need to
improve the
handover
and power
control
performance
when the
BCCH TRX
participates
in baseband
frequency
hopping.

8 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Index Type IDTYPE No


NOTE BSC6910
Configure Source Cell SRC2GNCE
this MO to Index LLID
activate the
quick Neighbor 2G NBR2GNC
handover Cell Index ELLID
algorithm.
Neighboring QUERYTYP
Cell Type E

9 G2GNCELL BSC6910 Is External ISNCELL No


NOTE Cell
Configure
this MO to
activate the
quick
handover
algorithm.

10 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Chain ISCHAINN No


NOTE BSC6910 Neighbor CELL
Configure Cell
this MO to
activate the Chain CHAINNC
quick Neighbour ELLTYPE
handover Cell Type
algorithm.
Quick ADJHOOF
Handover FSET
Offset for
Neighbor
Cell

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 132


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports


Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center

11 GCELLHO BSC6900/ Quick QUICKHO Yes


BASIC BSC6910 Handover EN
NOTE Enable
Configure
this MO to
activate the
quick
handover
algorithm.

12 GCELLHO BSC6900/ Quick PBGT QUICKPBG Yes


BASIC BSC6910 Handover THOEN
Enable

13 GCELLHOF BSC6900/ Handover HODIRFO Yes


AST BSC6910 Direction RECASTEN
NOTE Forecast
Configure Enable
this MO to
activate the Quick HOUPTRIG
quick Handover E
handover Up Trigger
algorithm. Level

Quick HODOWNT
Handover RIGE
Down
Trigger
Level

Quick Move MOVESPE


Speed EDTHRES
Threshold

Serving Cell SCELLFIL


Filter Length TER
MR Number

Neighbor NCELLFIL
Cell Filter TER
Length MR
Number

Ignore IGNOREM
Measuremen RNUM
t Report
Number

Quick TIMEPUNI
Handover SH
Punish Time

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 133


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports


Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center

Quick HOPUNIS
Handover HVALUE
Punish Value

Quick HOOFFSE
Handover T
Offset

Handover HODIRSTA
Direction TIME
Forecast
Statistic
Times

Handover HODIRLAS
Direction TTIME
Forecast
Last Times

Frequency AFCHOST
Shift ATTIME
Handover
Statistic
Time

Frequency AFCHOLA
Shift STTIME
Handover
Duration

Handover MSLEVSTR
Direction QPBGT
Forecast
Enable

14 GCELLOT BSC6900/ UL FREQADJ Yes


HEXT BSC6910 Frequency
NOTE Adjust
Configure Switch
this MO to
activate the DL DLFREQA
quick Frequency DJ
handover Adjust
algorithm. Switch

UL FREQADJ
Frequency VALUE
Adjust Value

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 134


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports


Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center

15 GCELLHO BSC6900/ TA HO TAHOEN Yes


BASIC BSC6910 Allowed
NOTE
Configure
this MO to
activate the
TA
handover
algorithm.

16 GCELLHO BSC6900/ TA TALIMIT Yes


EMG BSC6910 Threshold
NOTE
Configure
this MO to
activate the
TA
handover
algorithm.

17 GCELLHOF BSC6900/ Penalty SSTAPUNI Yes


ITPEN BSC6910 Level after SH
NOTE TA HO
Configure
this MO to Penalty TIMETAPU
activate the Time after NISH
TA TA HO
handover
algorithm.

18 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Index Type IDTYPE No


NOTE BSC6910
Configure Source Cell SRC2GNCE
this MO to Index LLID
activate the
TA Neighbor 2G NBR2GNC
handover Cell Index ELLID
algorithm.
Neighboring QUERYTYP
Cell Type E

19 G2GNCELL BSC6910 Is External ISNCELL No


NOTE Cell
Configure
this MO to
activate the
TA
handover
algorithm.

20 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ TA HO TASTATTI No


BSC6910 Watch Time ME

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 135


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports


Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center
NOTE TA HO TALASTTI
Configure Valid Time ME
this MO to
activate the
TA
handover
algorithm.

21 GCELLHO BSC6900/ BQ HO BQHOEN Yes


BASIC BSC6910 Allowed
NOTE
Configure
this MO to
activate the
BQ
handover
algorithm.

22 GCELLHO BSC6900/ DL Qual. DLQUALI Yes


EMG BSC6910 Threshold MIT
NOTE
Configure
UL Qual. ULQUALI
this MO to Threshold MIT
activate the
BQ
handover
algorithm.

23 GCELLAM BSC6900/ UL Qual. ULQUALI Yes


RQUL BSC6910 Limit for MITAMRF
NOTE AMR FR R
Configure
this MO to DL Qual. DLQUALI
activate the Limit for MITAMRF
BQ AMR FR R
handover
algorithm. UL Qual. ULQUALI
Limit for MITAMRH
AMR HR R

DL Qual. DLQUALI
Limit for MITAMRH
AMR HR R

24 GCELLHOF BSC6900/ Penalty SSBQPUNI Yes


ITPEN BSC6910 Level after SH
NOTE BQ HO
Configure
this MO to Penalty TIMEBQP
activate the Time after UNISH
BQ BQ HO
handover
algorithm.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 136


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports


Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center

25 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Index Type IDTYPE No


NOTE BSC6910
Configure Source Cell SRC2GNCE
this MO to Index LLID
activate the
BQ Neighbor 2G NBR2GNC
handover Cell Index ELLID
algorithm.
Neighboring QUERYTYP
Cell Type E

26 G2GNCELL BSC6910 Is External ISNCELL No


NOTE Cell
Configure
this MO to
activate the
BQ
handover
algorithm.

27 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ BQ HO BQSTATTI No


NOTE BSC6910 Watch Time ME
Configure
this MO to BQ HO BQLASTTI
activate the Valid Time ME
BQ
handover
algorithm.

28 GCELLHO BSC6900/ Interference INTERFHO Yes


BASIC BSC6910 HO Allowed EN
NOTE
Intracell HO INTRACEL
Configure
this MO to Allowed LHOEN
activate the
interference Inter-layer HOTHRES
handover HO
algorithm. Threshold

Interfere HO INTERFER
Static Time ESTATTIM
E

Interfere HO INTERFER
Valid Time ELASTTIM
E

29 GCELLHO BSC6900/ Forbidden BANTIME Yes


AD BSC6910 time after
MAX Times

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 137


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports


Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center
NOTE MAX MAXCNTN
Configure Consecutive UM
this MO to
activate the
HO Times
interference
handover
Interval for CONTINTV
algorithm. Consecutive
HO Jud.

30 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Index Type IDTYPE No


NOTE BSC6910
Configure Source Cell SRC2GNCE
this MO to Index LLID
activate the
interference Neighbor 2G NBR2GNC
handover Cell Index ELLID
algorithm.
Neighboring QUERYTYP
Cell Type E

31 G2GNCELL BSC6910 Is External ISNCELL No


NOTE Cell
Configure
this MO to
activate the
interference
handover
algorithm.

32 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Adjacent INTELEVH No


NOTE BSC6910 Cell Inter- OHYST
Configure layer HO
this MO to Hysteresis
activate the
interference
handover
algorithm.

33 GCELLAM BSC6900/ Interfere HO RXQUAL1 Yes


RQUL BSC6910 Qual. Thresh
NOTE 1 for Non-
Configure AMR FR
this MO to
activate the Interfere HO RXQUAL2
interference Qual. Thresh
handover 2 for Non-
algorithm. AMR FR

Interfere HO RXQUAL3
Qual. Thresh
3 for Non-
AMR FR

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 138


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports


Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center

Interfere HO RXQUAL4
Qual. Thresh
4 for Non-
AMR FR

Interfere HO RXQUAL5
Qual. Thresh
5 for Non-
AMR FR

Interfere HO RXQUAL6
Qual. Thresh
6 for Non-
AMR FR

Interfere HO RXQUAL7
Qual. Thresh
7 for Non-
AMR FR

Interfere HO RXQUAL8
Qual. Thresh
8 for Non-
AMR FR

Interfere HO RXQUAL9
Qual. Thresh
9 for Non-
AMR FR

Interfere HO RXQUAL10
Qual. Thresh
10 for Non-
AMR FR

Interfere HO RXQUAL11
Qual. Thresh
11 for Non-
AMR FR

Interfere HO RXQUAL12
Qual. Thresh
12 for Non-
AMR FR

Interfere HO RXLEVOF
Qual. Thresh F
Offset for
AMR FR

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 139


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports


Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center

34 GCELLHO BSC6900/ No Dl NODLMRH Yes


EMG BSC6910 Mr.HO OEN
NOTE Allowed
Configure
this MO to UL Qual. ULQUALI
activate the Threshold MIT
no-DL-MR
handover Cons.No Dl NODLMRH
algorithm. Mr.HO OALLOWLI
Allowed MIT
Limit

No Dl Mr. NODLMRH
HO Statistic OSTATTIM
Time E

No Dl Mr. NODLMRH
HO Last OLASTTIM
Time E

35 GCELLAM BSC6900/ UL Qual. ULQUALI Yes


RQUL BSC6910 Limit for MITAMRF
NOTE AMR FR R
Configure
this MO to UL Qual. ULQUALI
activate the Limit for MITAMRH
no-DL-MR AMR HR R
handover
algorithm.

36 GCELLHOF BSC6900/ Filter Length DATAQUA Yes


ITPEN BSC6910 for TCH FLTLEN
NOTE Qual
Configure
this MO to Filter Length SIGQUAFL
activate the for SDCCH TLEN
no-DL-MR Qual
handover
algorithm.

37 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Index Type IDTYPE No


NOTE BSC6910
Configure Source Cell SRC2GNCE
this MO to Index LLID
activate the
no-DL-MR Neighbor 2G NBR2GNC
handover Cell Index ELLID
algorithm.
Neighboring QUERYTYP
Cell Type E

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 140


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports


Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center

38 G2GNCELL BSC6910 Is External ISNCELL No


NOTE Cell
Configure
this MO to
activate the
no-DL-MR
handover
algorithm.

39 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ UL BQ HO ULBQSTAT No


NOTE BSC6910 Static Time TIME
Configure
this MO to UL BQ HO ULBQLAST
activate the Last Time TIME
no-DL-MR
handover
algorithm.

40 GCELL BSC6900/ Cell IUO IUOTP Yes


NOTE BSC6910 Type
Configure
this MO to Cell Inner/ CELLINEX
activate the Extra TP
enhanced Property
dual-band
network Same Group DBLFREQ
handover Cell Index ADJIDTYP
algorithm.
Type E

Same Group DBLFREQ


Cell Index ADJIDTYP
Type E

Same Group DBLFREQ


Cell Index ADJCID

Same Group DBLFREQ


Cell Name ADJCNAM
E

41 GCELLHO BSC6900/ Load HO OUTLOAD Yes


EDBPARA BSC6910 Allowed HOENABL
NOTE E
Configure
this MO to UL Subcell OUTGENO
activate the General VERLDTH
enhanced Overload RED
dual-band Threshold
network
handover
algorithm.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 141


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports


Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center

Inner Cell INNSERIO


Serious VERLDTH
OverLoad RED
Thred

Subcell HO EDBSYSFL
Allowed OWLEV
Flow
Control
Level

Incoming INTOINNR
OL Subcell EXLEVTH
HO Level RED
TH

UL Subcell OUTSERIO
Serious VERLDTH
Overload RED
Threshold

UL Subcell OUTLOAD
Load HOPERIO
Hierarchical D
HO Periods

MOD Step OUTLOAD


LEN of UL HOMODPE
Load HO RI
Period

Step Length OUTLOAD


of UL HOSTEP
Subcell
Load HO

UL Subcell OUTLOWL
Lower Load OADTHRE
Threshold D

Subcell HO EDBSYSFL
Allowed OWLEV
Flow
Control
Level

Outgoing OUTINNRE
OL Subcell XLEVTHR
HO Level ED
TH

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 142


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports


Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center

OL Subcell INNLOAD
Load HOPERI
Diversity
HO Period

Step Length INNLOAD


of OL HOSTEP
Subcell
Load HO

Distance ATCBTHR
Between ED
Boundaries
of Subcells

Distance ATCBHYST
Hysteresis
Between
Boundaries

42 GCELLHO BSC6900/ Edge HO FRINGEH


BASIC BSC6910 Allowed OEN
NOTE
Configure Edge HO ULEDGET
this MO to UL HRES
activate the RX_LEV
edge Threshold
handover
algorithm. Edge HO DLEDGET
DL HRES
RX_LEV
Threshold

Handover EDGESTAT
Algorithm II
Edge HO
Watch Time

Handover EDGELAST
Algorithm II
Edge HO
Valid Time

43 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Index Type IDTYPE No


NOTE BSC6910
Configure Source Cell SRC2GNCE
this MO to Index LLID
activate the
edge Neighbor 2G NBR2GNC
handover Cell Index ELLID
algorithm.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 143


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports


Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center

Neighboring QUERYTYP
Cell Type E

44 G2GNCELL BSC6910 Is External ISNCELL No


NOTE Cell
Configure
this MO to
activate the
edge
handover
algorithm.

45 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Adjacent INTELEVH No


NOTE BSC6910 Cell Inter- OHYST
Configure layer HO
this MO to Hysteresis
activate the
edge Edge HO EDGEADJS
handover AdjCell TATTIME
algorithm. Watch Time

Edge HO EDGEADJ
AdjCell LASTTIME
Valid Time

46 GCELLHO BSC6900/ Enhanced EDOUTHO Yes


BASIC BSC6910 Outgoing ADEN
NOTE Cell
Configure Handover
this MO to Allowed
activate the
edge
handover
algorithm.

47 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Index Type IDTYPE No


NOTE BSC6910
Configure Source Cell SRC2GNCE
this MO to Index LLID
activate the
edge Neighbor 2G NBR2GNC
handover Cell Index ELLID
algorithm.
Neighboring QUERYTYP
Cell Type E

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 144


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports


Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center

48 G2GNCELL BSC6910 Is External ISNCELL No


NOTE Cell
Configure
this MO to
activate the
edge
handover
algorithm.

49 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Enhanced EDOUTHO No


NOTE BSC6910 Outgoing OFFSET
Configure Cell
this MO to Handover
activate the Offset
edge
handover
algorithm.

50 GCELLBAS BSC6900/ Layer of The LAYER Yes


ICPARA BSC6910 Cell
NOTE
Configure
this MO to
activate the
fast-moving
micro cell
handover
algorithm.

51 GCELLHO BSC6900/ MS Fast QCKMVHO Yes


BASIC BSC6910 Moving HO EN
NOTE Allowed
Configure
this MO to Inter-layer HOTHRES
activate the HO
fast-moving Threshold
micro cell
handover
algorithm.

52 GCELLHO BSC6900/ MS Fast- QCKSTATC Yes


AD BSC6910 moving NT
NOTE Watch Cells
Configure
this MO to MS Fast- QCKTRUE
activate the moving CNT
fast-moving Valid Cells
micro cell
handover MS Fast- QCKTIMET
algorithm. moving H
Time
Threshold

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 145


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports


Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center

Penalty on SPEEDPU
MS Fast NISH
Moving HO

Penalty SPEEDPU
Time on Fast NISHT
Moving HO

53 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Index Type IDTYPE No


NOTE BSC6910
Configure Source Cell SRC2GNCE
this MO to Index LLID
activate the
fast-moving Neighbor 2G NBR2GNC
micro cell Cell Index ELLID
handover
algorithm. Neighboring QUERYTYP
Cell Type E

54 G2GNCELL BSC6910 Is External ISNCELL No


NOTE Cell
Configure
this MO to
activate the
fast-moving
micro cell
handover
algorithm.

55 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Adjacent INTELEVH No


NOTE BSC6910 Cell Inter- OHYST
Configure layer HO
this MO to Hysteresis
activate the
fast-moving HCS HO HCSSTATT
micro cell Watch Time IME
handover
algorithm. HCS HO HCSLASTT
Valid Time IME

56 GCELLHO BSC6900/ Better Cell BETTERCE Yes


BASIC BSC6910 Handover LLHOEN
NOTE Enable
Configure
this MO to Pathloss Ho. PATHLOSS
activate the Enable HOEN
fast-moving
micro cell
handover
algorithm.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 146


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports


Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center

57 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Index Type IDTYPE No


NOTE BSC6910
Configure Source Cell SRC2GNCE
this MO to Index LLID
activate the
fast-moving Neighbor 2G NBR2GNC
micro cell Cell Index ELLID
handover
algorithm. Neighboring QUERYTYP
Cell Type E

58 G2GNCELL BSC6910 Is External ISNCELL No


NOTE Cell
Configure
this MO to
activate the
fast-moving
micro cell
handover
algorithm.

59 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Better Cell BETTERCE No


NOTE BSC6910 HO Watch LLSTATTI
Configure Time ME
this MO to
activate the Better Cell BETTERCE
better-cell HO Valid LLLASTTI
handover Time ME
algorithm.

60 GCELLHO BSC6900/ Enhanced EDOUTHO


BASIC BSC6910 Outgoing ADEN
NOTE Cell
Configure Handover
this MO to Allowed
activate the
better-cell
handover
algorithm.

61 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Index Type IDTYPE No


NOTE BSC6910
Configure Source Cell SRC2GNCE
this MO to Index LLID
activate the
better-cell Neighbor 2G NBR2GNC
handover Cell Index ELLID
algorithm.
Neighboring QUERYTYP
Cell Type E

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 147


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports


Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center

62 G2GNCELL BSC6910 Is External ISNCELL No


NOTE Cell
Configure
this MO to
activate the
better-cell
handover
algorithm.

63 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Neighboring NCELLPU No


NOTE BSC6910 Cell Penalty NEN
Configure Switch
this MO to
activate the Enhanced EDOUTHO
better-cell Outgoing OFFSET
handover Cell
algorithm. Handover
Offset

Penalty Stop NCELLPU


Level NSTPTH
Threshold

Penalty NCELLPU
Timer NTM
Length

Level NCELLPU
Penalty NLEV
Value on
Neighboring
Cell

64 GCELLHO BSC6900/ Load LoadHoEn Yes


BASIC BSC6910 Handover
NOTE Support
Configure
this MO to
activate the
load
handover
penalty
inheritance
algorithm.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 148


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports


Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center

65 GCELLHOF BSC6900/ Load HO LoadHoPun Yes


ITPEN BSC6910 Penalty ishInheritS
NOTE Optimizatio witch
Configure n
this MO to
activate the
load
handover
penalty
inheritance
algorithm.

GCELLHO F-H HO F2HHOLO


BASIC Load Band ADSTFSWI
NOTE Optimizatio TCH
Configure n Allowed
this MO to
activate the TCHF- FullToHalf
TCHF- TCHH HO HoLoadStf
TCHH Load
handover
Hysteresis
optimization
algorithm.
AMR F-H AMRF2HH
HO Quality OQUALTH
Thres. Fine FINE
Tune

Non-AMR NOAMRF2
F-H HO HHOQUAL
Quality THFINE
Thres. Fine
Tune

AMR H-F AMRH2FH


HO Quality OQUALFIN
Thres. Fine E
Tune

Non-AMR NOAMRHA
H-F HO LFTOFULL
Quality HOQUALT
Thres. Fine HRESH
Tune

AMR F-H AMRFULL


Ho Qual. TOHALFH
Threshold OQUALTH
RESH

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 149


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports


Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center

AMR H-F AMRHALF


Ho Qual. TOFULLH
Threshold OQUALTH
RESH

Non-AMR NOAMRFU
F-H Ho LLTOHALF
Qual. HOQUALT
Threshold HRESH

Non-AMR NOAMRHA
H-F Ho LFTOFULL
Qual. HOQUALT
Threshold HRESH

AMR F-H AMRFULL


Ho ATCB TOHALFH
Threshold OATCBTH
RESH

AMR H-F AMRHALF


Ho ATCB TOFULLH
Threshold OATCBTH
RESH

Non-AMR NOAMRFU
F-H Ho LLTOHALF
ATCB HOATCBT
Threshold HRESH

Non-AMR NOAMRHA
H-F Ho LFTOFULL
ATCB HOATCBT
Threshold HRESH

66 GCELLHO BSC6900/ AMR F-H AMRFULL Yes


BASIC BSC6910 Ho Allowed TOHALFH
NOTE OALLOW
Configure
this MO to Allow AMR AMRHALF
activate the H-F Quality- TOFULLH
TCHF- based HO OQUALAL
TCHH LOW
handover
algorithm. Non-AMR NOAMRFU
F-H Ho LLTOHALF
Allowed HOALLOW

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 150


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports


Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center

Allow Non- NOAMRHA


AMR H-F LFTOFULL
Quality- HOQUALA
based HO LLOW

AMR F-H AMRFULL


Traffic TOHALFH
Threshold OTHRESH

F-H Ho FULLTOH
Duration ALFHODU
RATION

F-H Ho FULLTOH
Period ALFHOPE
RIOD

AMR F-H AMRFULL


Ho Pathloss TOHALFH
Adjust Step OPATHADJ
STEP

AMR F-H AMRFULL


Ho ATCB TOHALFH
Adjust Step OATCBADJ
STEP

AMR F-H AMRFULL


Ho Pathloss TOHALFH
Threshold OPATHTH
RESH

F-H Pathloss FULLTOH


Offset ALFHOPAT
Overlay HOFFSET

AMR F-H AMRFULL


Ho ATCB TOHALFH
Threshold OATCBTH
RESH

F-H ATCB FULLTOH


Offset ALFHOAT
Overlay CBOFFSET

AMR F-H AMRFULL


Ho Qual. TOHALFH
Threshold OQUALTH
RESH

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 151


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports


Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center

F-H Ho Stat. FULLTOH


Time ALFHOSTA
TTIME

F-H Ho Last FULLTOH


Time ALFHOLA
STTIME

AMR H-F AMRHALF


Traffic TOFULLH
Threshold OTHRESH

H-F Ho HALFTOF
Duration ULLHODU
RATION

AMR H-F AMRHALF


Ho ATCB TOFULLH
Threshold OATCBTH
RESH

H-F ATCB HALFTOF


Offset ULLATCBO
Overlay FFSET

Non-AMR AMRHALF
H-F Ho TOFULLH
Pathloss OPATHTH
Threshold RESH

H-F Pathloss HALFTOF


Offset ULLHOPAT
Overlay HOFFSET

Non-AMR AMRHALF
H-F Ho TOFULLH
Qual. OQUALTH
Threshold RESH

H-F Ho Stat. HALFTOF


Time ULLHOSTA
TTIME

H-F Ho Last HALFTOF


Time ULLHOLA
STTIME

Non-AMR NOAMRFU
F-H Traffic LLTOHALF
Threshold THRESH

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 152


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports


Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center

Non-AMR NOAMRFU
F-H Ho LLTOHALF
Pathloss HOPATHA
Adjust Step DJSTEP

Non-AMR NOAMRFU
F-H Ho LLTOHALF
ATCB HOATCBA
Adjust Step DJSTEP

Non-AMR NOAMRFU
F-H Ho LLTOHALF
Pathloss HOPATHT
Threshold HRESH

Non-AMR NOAMRFU
F-H Ho LLTOHALF
ATCB HOATCBT
Threshold HRESH

Non-AMR NOAMRFU
F-H Ho LLTOHALF
Qual. HOQUALT
Threshold HRESH

Non-AMR NOAMRHA
H-F Traffic LFTOFULL
Threshold THRESH

Non-AMR NOAMRHA
H-F Ho LFTOFULL
ATCB HOATCBT
Threshold HRESH

Non-AMR NOAMRHA
H-F Ho LFTOFULL
Pathloss HOPATHT
Threshold HRESH

Non-AMR NOAMRHA
H-F Ho LFTOFULL
Qual. HOQUALT
Threshold HRESH

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 153


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Supports


Name ID CME Batch
Modificati
on Center

67 GTRXDEV BSC6900/ TCH Rate TCHAJFLA Yes


NOTE BSC6910 Adjust G
Configure Allow
this MO to
activate the
TCHF-
TCHH
handover
algorithm.

68 GCELLCC BSC6900/ Speech VOICEVER Yes


ACCESS BSC6910 Version
NOTE
Configure
this MO to
activate the
TCHF-
TCHH
handover
algorithm.

69 BSCBASIC BSC6900/ A Interface Aver Yes


NOTE BSC6910 Tag
Configure
this MO to Abis AbisVer
activate the Interface
TCHF- Tag
TCHH
handover Um UmVer
algorithm. Interface
Tag

70 GCELLHO BSC6900/ SDCCH HO SIGCHAN Yes


BASIC BSC6910 Allowed HOEN
NOTE
Configure
this MO to
activate the
SDCCH
handover
algorithm.

71 GCELLHO BSC6900/ Inter-BSC INRBSCSD Yes


CTRL BSC6910 SDCCH HO HOEN
NOTE ALLowed
Configure
this MO to
activate the
SDCCH
handover
algorithm.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 154


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

6.5.4 Activation Observation


On the BSC LMT, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Run the LST GCELLHOBASIC command to query the value of Current HO Control
Algorithm.
Expected result: The value of Current HO Control Algorithm is Handover algorithm II.
Step 2 Trace BSSAP messages over the A interface.
Expected result: The BSC sends a Handover Performed message to the MSC.
The cause value contained in the Handover Performed message varies depending on the
handover type. The following table lists the cause value for each handover type.

Handover Type Cause Value

Quick handover better-cell

TA handover distance

BQ handover uplink-quality or downlink-quality

Interference handover uplink-quality or downlink-quality

Handover due to no downlink measurement uplink-quality


report

Enhanced dual-band network handover better-cell or traffic

Load handover traffic

Edge handover uplink-strength or downlink-strength

Fast-moving micro cell handover better-cell

Better-cell handover better-cell

TCHF-TCHH handover downlink-quality

SDCCH handover better-cell, distance, uplink-quality,


downlink-quality, traffic, uplink-strength, or
downlink-strength

Step 3 (Optional) Verify the load handover penalty inheritance algorithm by performing the
following steps:
1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with Load Handover Support set to
YES(Yes) for cell A.
2. Run the SET GCELLHOFITPEN command with Load HO Penalty Optimization set
to ON(On) for cell A. Ensure that a load handover is performed from cell C to cell B,
then to cell A.
3. Run the SET GCELLHOAD command with the following parameters set to appropriate
values for cell A to ensure that the conditions for triggering a load handover from cell A
to cell C are met: Load HO Threshold, Load handover Load Accept Threshold,
Load HO Bandwidth, and Load HO Step Level.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 155


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

Expected result: A load handover from cell A to cell C is not triggered.

Step 4 (Optional) Verify the TCHF-TCHH handover optimization algorithm by performing the
following steps:
1. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with all the following parameters set to
YES(Yes): AMR F-H Ho Allowed, Allow AMR H-F Quality-based HO, Non-AMR F-H
Ho Allowed, and Allow Non-AMR H-F Quality-based HO.
2. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with F-H HO Load Band Optimization
Allowed set to ON(On).
3. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with AMR F-H Traffic Threshold and
TCHF-TCHH HO Load Hysteresis set according to onsite requirements for cell A.
Ensure that the following condition is met after some AMR FR calls are converted into
AMR HR calls in the cell:
Cell load < AMR F-H Traffic Threshold – TCHF-TCHH HO Load Hysteresis
Expected result: Only some AMR FR calls support TCHF-to-TCHH handovers.
4. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with Non-AMR H-F Ho ATCB Threshold
set to –10.
Expected result: Only the AMR HR calls whose ATCB values are less than or equal to
–10 support TCHH-to-TCHF handovers.
5. Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with Non-AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold
set to 3 and Non-AMR H-F HO Quality Thres. Fine Tune set to 9.
Expected result: Only the AMR HR calls whose TCHF-TCHH handover quality
thresholds exceed 39 support TCHH-to-TCHF handovers

----End

6.5.5 Deactivation

Using the LMT


On the BSC LMT, run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with Current HO Control
Algorithm set to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).

MML Command Examples


//Deactivating HUAWEI II Handover

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;

Using the CME


NOTE

When configuring the HUAWEI II Handover and AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment features on the
CME, you must perform a single configuration first, and then perform batch modifications if required.
You must perform a single configuration for a parameter before batch modifications of the parameter.
You are advised to perform batch modifications before logging out of the parameter setting interface.

Step 1 Configure a single object on the CME. (CME single configuration)

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 156


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

Set parameters on the CME configuration interface according to the operation sequence
described in Table 6-5. For the method of performing the CME single configuration, see
CME Single Configuration Operation Guide.

Step 2 (Optional) Modify objects in batches on the CME. (CME batch modification center)

To modify objects, such as BSCs, BTSs, cells, and TRXs, in batches, click the icon on the
CME configuration interface to start the batch modification wizard. For the method of
performing batch modifications through the CME batch modification center, press F1 on the
wizard interface to obtain online help.

Table 6-5 Configuring the parameter on the CME

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Configura


Name ID ble in CME
Batch
Modificati
on Center

1 GCELLHO BSC6900/ Current HO HOCTRLS Yes


BASIC BSC6910 Control WITCH
Algorithm

----End

6.6 Deploying Direct Retry

6.6.1 Deployment Requirements

Table 6-6 Deployment requirements

Aspect Requirement

Related features See 4 Related Features.

BSC None

BTS None

GSM networking None

MS None

MSC None

License None

Others None

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 157


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

6.6.2 Activation
Using the LMT
On the BSC LMT, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command with Directed Retry set to YES(Yes).

Step 2 Run the SET GCELLCCBASIC command with Directed Retry Load Access Threshold
set according to the actual load of candidate neighboring cells.
Step 3 Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with Current HO Control Algorithm set to an
appropriate value.
l If Current HO Control Algorithm is set to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm
I), run the SET GCELLHOCTRL command with Min Power Level For Directed
Retry set according to the actual receive level of neighboring cells.
l If Current HO Control Algorithm is set to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm
II), run the ADD G2GNCELL command with cells 0 and 1 set to neighboring GSM
cells. Then, set Inter-cell HO Hysteresis and Directed Retry Handover Level Range
for cell 1 according to onsite requirements. If a BSC6910 is used, set Is External Cell.
Step 4 (Optional) Set the number of cells for directed retry and the priorities of these cells.
1. Run the SET GCELLOTHEXT command with DRD HO Target Cell Selection
Optimized set to YES(Yes).
2. Run the SET GCELLHOAD command with Max. Num. of HO Attempts set
according to network plan.

----End

MML Command Examples


//Activating Direct Retry for the BSC6900
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DIRECTRYEN=YES;
SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DRTAGCELLSEL=YES;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOTRYCNT=3;
SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DTLOADTHRED=85;
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,
HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;
SET GCELLHOCTRL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MINPWRLEVDIRTRY=16;
ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;

//Activating Direct Retry for the BSC6910


SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DIRECTRYEN=YES;
SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DRTAGCELLSEL=YES;
SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOTRYCNT=3;

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 158


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DTLOADTHRED=85;

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;

SET GCELLHOCTRL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MINPWRLEVDIRTRY=16;

ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1,


ISNCELL=INNCELL, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL,
SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1;

Using the CME


NOTE

When configuring the Direct Retry feature on the CME, you must perform a single configuration first,
and then perform batch modifications if required.
You must perform a single configuration for a parameter before batch modifications of the parameter.
You are advised to perform batch modifications before logging out of the parameter setting interface.

Step 1 Configure a single object on the CME. (CME single configuration)

Set parameters on the CME configuration interface according to the operation sequence
described in Table 6-7. For the method of performing the CME single configuration, see
CME Single Configuration Operation Guide.

Step 2 (Optional) Modify objects in batches on the CME. (CME batch modification center)

To modify objects, such as BSCs, BTSs, cells, and TRXs, in batches, click the icon on the
CME configuration interface to start the batch modification wizard. For the method of
performing batch modifications through the CME batch modification center, press F1 on the
wizard interface to obtain online help.

----End

Table 6-7 Configuring parameters on the CME

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Configura


Name ID ble in CME
Batch
Modificati
on Center

1 GCELLBAS BSC6900/ Directed DIRECTRY Yes


ICPARA BSC6910 Retry EN

2 GCELLCCB BSC6900/ Directed DTLOADT Yes


ASIC BSC6910 Retry Load HRED
Access
Threshold

BSC6900/ Current HO HOCTRLS


BSC6910 Control WITCH
Algorithm

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 159


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Configura


Name ID ble in CME
Batch
Modificati
on Center

3 GCELLHO BSC6900/ Min Power MINPWRL Yes


CTRL BSC6910 Level For EVDIRTRY
NOTE Directed
Configure Retry
this MO if
Current
HO Control
Algorithm
is set to
HOALGO
RITHM1(H
andover
algorithm
I)

4 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Inter-cell INTERCEL No


NOTE BSC6910 HO LHYST
Configure Hysteresis
this MO if
Current Directed DRHOLEV
HO Control Retry RANGE
Algorithm Handover
is set to
Level Range
HOALGO
RITHM2(H
BSC6910 Is External ISNCELL
andover
algorithm Cell
II).

5 GCELLOT BSC6900/ DRD HO DRTAGCE Yes


HEXT BSC6910 Target Cell LLSEL
NOTE Selection
Configure Optimized
this MO to
set the
number of
cells for
directed
retry and the
priorities of
these cells.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 160


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Configura


Name ID ble in CME
Batch
Modificati
on Center

6 GCELLHO BSC6900/ Max. Num. HOTRYCN Yes


AD BSC6910 of HO T
NOTE Attempts
Configure
this MO to
set the
number of
cells for
directed
retry and the
priorities of
these cells.

6.6.3 Activation Observation


On the BSC LMT, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Block all TCHs in cell 0. Meanwhile, ensure that the SDCCH in cell 0 is available.

Step 2 Trace BSSAP messages over the A interface and RSL messages over the Abis interface in
cells 0 and 1.
Step 3 Use an MS to initiate a call in cell 0.

Step 4 View the BSSAP messages traced over the A interface and RSL messages traced over the
Abis interface in cells 0 and 1.
Expected result: The call has been set up and the voice quality is good. A Handover Detection
message is traced over the Abis interface and an Assignment Complete message is traced over
the A interface in cell 1. For an intra-BSC directed retry, after you enable CDT during a single
user trace task, the value of ucHoCause in the crdlc-msip-ho-trig-ind message is "directed-
retry". For an inter-BSC directed retry, the handover cause value in the Handover Required
message traced on the A interface in cell 0 is "directed-retry".

----End

6.6.4 Deactivation
Using the LMT
On the BSC LMT, run the SET GCELLBASICPARA command with Directed Retry set to
NO(No).

MML Command Examples


//Deactivating Direct Retry
SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DIRECTRYEN=NO;

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 161


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

Using the CME


NOTE

When configuring the Direct Retry feature on the CME, you must perform a single configuration first,
and then perform batch modifications if required.
You must perform a single configuration for a parameter before batch modifications of the parameter.
You are advised to perform batch modifications before logging out of the parameter setting interface.

Step 1 Configure a single object on the CME. (CME single configuration)

Set parameters on the CME configuration interface according to the operation sequence
described in Table 6-8. For the method of performing the CME single configuration, see
CME Single Configuration Operation Guide.

Step 2 (Optional) Modify objects in batches on the CME. (CME batch modification center)

To modify objects, such as BSCs, BTSs, cells, and TRXs, in batches, click the icon on the
CME configuration interface to start the batch modification wizard. For the method of
performing batch modifications through the CME batch modification center, press F1 on the
wizard interface to obtain online help.

----End

Table 6-8 Configuring the parameter on the CME


SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Configura
Name ID ble in CME
Batch
Modificati
on Center

1 GCELLBAS BSC6900/ Directed DIRECTRY Yes


ICPARA BSC6910 Retry EN

6.7 Deploying Pre-processing of Measurement Report

6.7.1 Deployment Requirements

Table 6-9 Deployment requirements


Aspect Requirement

Related features See 4 Related Features.

BSC None

BTS The BTS supports this feature.

GSM networking None

MS None

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 162


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

Aspect Requirement

MSC None

License None

Others None

6.7.2 Activation

Using the LMT


On the BSC LMT, run the SET GCELLHOCTRL command with its parameters set as
follows:

l Set MR.Preprocessing to BTS_Preprocessing(BTS preprocessing).


l Set Transfer Original MR, Transfer BTS/MS Power Class, and Sent Freq.of
preprocessed MR according to network plan.

MML Command Examples


//Activating Pre-processing of Measurement Report

SET GCELLHOCTRL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


BTSMESRPTPREPROC=BTS_Preprocessing, PRIMMESPPT=NO, BSMSPWRLEV=YES,
MRPREPROCFREQ=Once_ps;

Using the CME


NOTE

When configuring the Pre-processing of Measurement Report feature on the CME, you must perform a
single configuration first, and then perform batch modifications if required.
You must perform a single configuration for a parameter before batch modifications of the parameter.
You are advised to perform batch modifications before logging out of the parameter setting interface.

Step 1 Configure a single object on the CME. (CME single configuration)

Set parameters on the CME configuration interface according to the operation sequence
described in Table 6-10. For the method of performing the CME single configuration, see
CME Single Configuration Operation Guide.

Step 2 (Optional) Modify objects in batches on the CME. (CME batch modification center)

To modify objects, such as BSCs, BTSs, cells, and TRXs, in batches, click the icon on the
CME configuration interface to start the batch modification wizard. For the method of
performing batch modifications through the CME batch modification center, press F1 on the
wizard interface to obtain online help.

----End

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 163


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

Table 6-10 Configuring parameters on the CME

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Configura


Name ID ble in CME
Batch
Modificati
on Center

1 GCELLHO BSC6900/ MR.Preproc BTSMESRP Yes


CTRL BSC6910 essing TPREPROC

Transfer PRIMMES
Original MR PPT

Transfer BSMSPWR
BTS/MS LEV
Power Class

Sent Freq.of MRPREPR


preprocessed OCFREQ
MR

6.7.3 Activation Observation


On the BSC LMT, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Trace RSL messages over the Abis interface. For details, see section "Tracing CS Domain
RSL Messages on the Abis Interface" in BSC6900 LMT User Guide or BSC6910 LMT User
Guide.

Step 2 Use an MS to call a fixed-line phone in the test cell.

Step 3 Check whether the Preprocessed Measurement Result message is displayed in the trace
window. If so, this feature has been activated.

----End

6.7.4 Deactivation

Using the LMT


On the BSC LMT, run the SET GCELLHOCTRL command with MR.Preprocessing set to
BSC_Preprocessing(BSC preprocessing).

MML Command Examples


//Deactivating Pre-processing of Measurement Report

SET GCELLHOCTRL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,


BTSMESRPTPREPROC=BSC_Preprocessing;

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 164


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

Using the CME


NOTE

When configuring the Pre-processing of Measurement Report feature on the CME, you must perform a
single configuration first, and then perform batch modifications if required.
You must perform a single configuration for a parameter before batch modifications of the parameter.
You are advised to perform batch modifications before logging out of the parameter setting interface.

Step 1 Configure a single object on the CME. (CME single configuration)


Set parameters on the CME configuration interface according to the operation sequence
described in Table 6-11. For the method of performing the CME single configuration, see
CME Single Configuration Operation Guide.
Step 2 (Optional) Modify objects in batches on the CME. (CME batch modification center)

To modify objects, such as BSCs, BTSs, cells, and TRXs, in batches, click the icon on the
CME configuration interface to start the batch modification wizard. For the method of
performing batch modifications through the CME batch modification center, press F1 on the
wizard interface to obtain online help.

----End

Table 6-11 Configuring the parameter on the CME


SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Configura
Name ID ble in CME
Batch
Modificati
on Center

1 GCELLHO BSC6900/ MR.Preproc BTSMESRP Yes


CTRL BSC6910 essing TPREPROC

6.8 Deploying Fast Move Handover

6.8.1 Deployment Requirements


Table 6-12 Deployment requirements
Aspect Requirement

Related features See 4 Related Features.

BSC None

BTS BTSs other than the BTS3900B and


BTS3900E are used.

GSM networking None

MS None

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 165


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

Aspect Requirement

MSC None

License The license controlling this feature has been


activated. For details on how to activate the
license, see License Management Feature
Parameter Description. For details about
license items, see License Control Item
Description.

Others None

6.8.2 Activation

Using the LMT


On the BSC LMT, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with both Quick Handover Enable and Quick
PBGT Handover Enable set to YES(Yes).

Step 2 Run the SET GCELLHOFAST command with the following parameters set according to
onsite requirements: Quick Move Speed Threshold, Quick Handover Up Trigger Level,
Quick Handover Down Trigger Level, Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish
Time, Quick Handover Punish Value, Serving Cell Filter Length MR Number, Neighbor
Cell Filter Length MR Number, Ignore Measurement Report Number, EN Quick PBGT
HO ALG When MS Leaves BTS, Handover Direction Forecast Enable, Handover
Direction Forecast Statistic Times, Frequency Shift Handover Statistic Time, Frequency
Shift Handover Duration, and Fast Handover Punish Control Switch.
NOTE

Run the LST G2GNCELL command to query information about neighboring GSM cells.
If a cell is configured with external neighboring GSM cells, run the MOD GEXT2GCELL command
with Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish Time, and Quick Handover Punish Value set
according to onsite requirements.

Step 3 Run the SET GCELLOTHEXT command with UL Frequency Adjust Switch and UL
Frequency Adjust Value set according to onsite requirements.

----End

MML Command Examples


//Activating Fast Move Handover

SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, QUICKHOEN=YES,


QUICKPBGTHOEN=YES;

SET GCELLHOFAST: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, HOUPTRIGE=50,


HODOWNTRIGE=50, MOVESPEEDTHRES=35, MSLEVSTRQPBGT=YES,
QuickHoPunishSw=ON;

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 166


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FREQADJ=YES,


FREQADJVALUE=255;

Using the CME


NOTE

When configuring the Fast Move Handover feature on the CME, you must perform a single
configuration first, and then perform batch modifications if required.
You must perform a single configuration for a parameter before batch modifications of the parameter.
You are advised to perform batch modifications before logging out of the parameter setting interface.

Step 1 Configure a single object on the CME. (CME single configuration)

Set parameters on the CME configuration interface according to the operation sequence
described in Table 6-13. For the method of performing the CME single configuration, see
CME Single Configuration Operation Guide.

Step 2 (Optional) Modify objects in batches on the CME. (CME batch modification center)

To modify objects, such as BSCs, BTSs, cells, and TRXs, in batches, click the icon on the
CME configuration interface to start the batch modification wizard. For the method of
performing batch modifications through the CME batch modification center, press F1 on the
wizard interface to obtain online help.

----End

Table 6-13 Configuring parameters on the CME

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Configura


Name ID ble in CME
Batch
Modificati
on Center

1 GCELLHO BSC6900/ Quick QUICKHO Yes


BASIC BSC6910 Handover EN
Enable

Quick PBGT QUICKPBG


Handover THOEN
Enable

2 GCELLHOF BSC6900/ Quick HOUPTRIG Yes


AST BSC6910 Handover E
Up Trigger
Level

Quick HODOWNT
Handover RIGE
Down
Trigger
Level

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 167


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Configura


Name ID ble in CME
Batch
Modificati
on Center

Quick HOOFFSE
Handover T
Offset

Fast QuickHoPu
Handover nishSw
Punish
Control
Switch

Quick TIMEPUNI
Handover SH
Punish Time

Quick HOPUNIS
Handover HVALUE
Punish Value

Serving Cell SCELLFIL


Filter Length TER
MR Number

Neighbor NCELLFIL
Cell Filter TER
Length MR
Number

Ignore IGNOREM
Measuremen RNUM
t Report
Number

EN Quick MSLEVSTR
PBGT HO QPBGT
ALG When
MS Leaves
BTS

Handover HODIRFO
Direction RECASTEN
Forecast
Enable

Handover HODIRSTA
Direction TIME
Forecast
Statistic
Times

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 168


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Configura


Name ID ble in CME
Batch
Modificati
on Center

Frequency AFCHOST
Shift ATTIME
Handover
Statistic
Time

Frequency AFCHOLA
Shift STTIME
Handover
Duration

Fast QuickHoPu
Handover nishSw
Punish
Control
Switch

3 GCELLOT BSC6900/ UL FREQADJ Yes


HEXT BSC6910 Frequency
Adjust
Switch

UL FREQADJ
Frequency VALUE
Adjust Value

6.8.3 Activation Observation


On the BSC LMT, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Move an MS away from the serving cell at a speed greater than Quick Move Speed
Threshold until the frequency offset in the measurement report, CH RQD, or HO DETECT
message is a negative value. If the frequency offset information fails to be reported or the
frequency offset information is invalid, the uplink level in the serving cell is lower than
Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, the downlink level in the serving cell is lower than
Quick Handover Down Trigger Level, and the path loss of chain neighboring cells is lower
than the path loss of the serving cell minus the sum of Quick Handover Offset and Quick
Handover Offset for Neighbor Cell.
Step 2 Trace BSSAP messages over the A interface.
Expected result: The BSC sends a Handover Performed message to the MSC, with the cause
value "better-cell".

----End

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 169


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

6.8.4 Deactivation
Using the LMT
On the BSC LMT, run the SET GCELLHOBASIC command with Quick PBGT Handover
Enable set to NO(No).

NOTE

Quick handovers consist of fast move handovers and frequency offset handovers. Quick Handover
Enable controls whether to allow fast move handovers and frequency offset handovers. In this step, you
can also deactivate the fast move handover by setting Quick Handover Enable to NO(No), but the
frequency offset handover is deactivated at the same time.

MML Command Examples


//Deactivating Fast Move Handover
SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, QUICKPBGTHOEN=NO;

Using the CME


NOTE

When configuring the Fast Move Handover feature on the CME, you must perform a single
configuration first, and then perform batch modifications if required.
You must perform a single configuration for a parameter before batch modifications of the parameter.
You are advised to perform batch modifications before logging out of the parameter setting interface.

Step 1 Configure a single object on the CME. (CME single configuration)


Set parameters on the CME configuration interface according to the operation sequence
described in Table 6-14. For the method of performing the CME single configuration, see
CME Single Configuration Operation Guide.
Step 2 (Optional) Modify objects in batches on the CME. (CME batch modification center)

To modify objects, such as BSCs, BTSs, cells, and TRXs, in batches, click the icon on the
CME configuration interface to start the batch modification wizard. For the method of
performing batch modifications through the CME batch modification center, press F1 on the
wizard interface to obtain online help.

----End

Table 6-14 Configuring the parameter on the CME


SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Configura
Name ID ble in CME
Batch
Modificati
on Center

1 GCELLHO BSC6900/ Quick PBGT QUICKPBG Yes


BASIC BSC6910 Handover THOEN
Enable

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 170


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

6.9 Deploying Chain Cell Handover

6.9.1 Deployment Requirements


Table 6-15 Deployment requirements
Aspect Requirement

Related features See 4 Related Features.

BSC None

BTS None

GSM networking None

MS None

MSC None

License The license controlling this feature has been


activated. For details on how to activate the
license, see License Management Feature
Parameter Description. For details about
license items, see License Control Item
Description.

Others None

6.9.2 Activation
Using the LMT
On the BSC LMT, run the ADD G2GNCELL command with Chain Neighbor Cell set to
YES(Yes). If a cell has been added as a neighboring GSM cell, run the MOD G2GNCELL
command with Neighboring Cell Type set to HANDOVERNCELL(Handover
Neighboring cell) and Chain Neighbor Cell set to YES(Yes).

MML Command Examples


//Activating Chain Cell Handover
ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, NBR2GNCELLID=2,
NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,
ISCHAINNCELL=YES;

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 171


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

Using the CME


NOTE

When configuring the Chain Cell Handover feature on the CME, you must perform a single
configuration first, and then perform batch modifications if required.
You must perform a single configuration for a parameter before batch modifications of the parameter.
You are advised to perform batch modifications before logging out of the parameter setting interface.

Step 1 Configure a single object on the CME. (CME single configuration)


Set parameters on the CME configuration interface according to the operation sequence
described in Table 6-16. For the method of performing the CME single configuration, see
CME Single Configuration Operation Guide.
Step 2 (Optional) Modify objects in batches on the CME. (CME batch modification center)

To modify objects, such as BSCs, BTSs, cells, and TRXs, in batches, click the icon on the
CME configuration interface to start the batch modification wizard. For the method of
performing batch modifications through the CME batch modification center, press F1 on the
wizard interface to obtain online help.

----End

Table 6-16 Configuring the parameter on the CME


SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Configura
Name ID ble in CME
Batch
Modificati
on Center

1 GCELLOT BSC6900/ Power Boost HOPOWER No


HBASIC BSC6910 before HO BOOST
Enabled or
Not

6.9.3 Activation Observation


On the BSC LMT, run the LST G2GNCELL command to query the value of Chain
Neighbor Cell.
Expected result: The value of Chain Neighbor Cell is Yes.

6.9.4 Deactivation
Using the LMT
On the BSC LMT, run the MOD G2GNCELL command with Chain Neighbor Cell set to
NO(No).

MML Command Examples


//Deactivating Chain Cell Handover for the BSC6900

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 172


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1024, NBR2GNCELLID=2542,


NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ISCHAINNCELL=NO;

//Deactivating Chain Cell Handover for the BSC6910

MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1024, NBR2GNCELLID=2542,


ISNCELL=INNCELL, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ISCHAINNCELL=NO;

Using the CME


NOTE

When configuring the Chain Cell Handover feature on the CME, you must perform a single
configuration first, and then perform batch modifications if required.
You must perform a single configuration for a parameter before batch modifications of the parameter.
You are advised to perform batch modifications before logging out of the parameter setting interface.

Step 1 Configure a single object on the CME. (CME single configuration)

Set parameters on the CME configuration interface according to the operation sequence
described in Table 6-17. For the method of performing the CME single configuration, see
CME Single Configuration Operation Guide.

Step 2 (Optional) Modify objects in batches on the CME. (CME batch modification center)

To modify objects, such as BSCs, BTSs, cells, and TRXs, in batches, click the icon on the
CME configuration interface to start the batch modification wizard. For the method of
performing batch modifications through the CME batch modification center, press F1 on the
wizard interface to obtain online help.

----End

Table 6-17 Configuring the parameter on the CME


SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Configura
Name ID ble in CME
Batch
Modificati
on Center

1 G2GNCELL BSC6900/ Chain Cell ISCHAINN No


BSC6910 Handover CELL

6.10 Deploying BTS power lift for handover

6.10.1 Deployment Requirements

Table 6-18 Deployment requirements

Aspect Requirement

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 173


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

Related features See 4 Related Features.

BSC None

BTS None

GSM networking None

MS None

MSC None

License The license controlling this feature has been


activated. For details on how to activate the
license, see License Management Feature
Parameter Description. For details about
license items, see License Control Item
Description.

Others None

6.10.2 Activation

Using the LMT


On the BSC LMT, run the SET GCELLOTHBASIC command with Power Boost before
HO Enabled or Not set to YES(StartUp).

MML Command Examples


//Activating BTS power lift for handover

SET GCELLOTHBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPOWERBOOST=YES;

Using the CME


NOTE

When configuring the Chain Cell Handover feature on the CME, you must perform a single
configuration first, and then perform batch modifications if required.
You must perform a single configuration for a parameter before batch modifications of the parameter.
You are advised to perform batch modifications before logging out of the parameter setting interface.

Step 1 Configure a single object on the CME. (CME single configuration)

Set parameters on the CME configuration interface according to the operation sequence
described in Table 6-19. For the method of performing the CME single configuration, see
CME Single Configuration Operation Guide.

Step 2 (Optional) Modify objects in batches on the CME. (CME batch modification center)

To modify objects, such as BSCs, BTSs, cells, and TRXs, in batches, click the icon on the
CME configuration interface to start the batch modification wizard. For the method of

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 174


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

performing batch modifications through the CME batch modification center, press F1 on the
wizard interface to obtain online help.

----End

Table 6-19 Configuring parameters on the CME

SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Configura


Name ID ble in CME
Batch
Modificati
on Center

1 GCELLOT BSC6900/ Chain ISCHAINN Yes


HBASIC BSC6910 Neighbor CELL
Cell

Neighboring NCELLTYP
Cell Type E

Chain ISCHAINN
Neighbor CELL
Cell

6.10.3 Activation Observation


On the BSC LMT, run the LST GCELLOTHBASIC command to query the value of Power
Boost before HO Enabled or Not.

Expected result: The value of Power Boost before HO Enabled or Not is StartUp.

6.10.4 Deactivation

Using MML Commands


On the BSC LMT, run the SET GCELLOTHBASIC command with Power Boost before
HO Enabled or Not set to NO(Not StartUp).

MML Command Examples


//Deactivating BTS power lift for handover

SET GCELLOTHBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPOWERBOOST=NO;

Using the CME


NOTE

When configuring the BTS power lift for handover feature on the CME, you must perform a single
configuration first, and then perform batch modifications if required.
You must perform a single configuration for a parameter before batch modifications of the parameter.
You are advised to perform batch modifications before logging out of the parameter setting interface.

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 175


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 6 Engineering Guidelines

Step 1 Configure a single object on the CME. (CME single configuration)


Set parameters on the CME configuration interface according to the operation sequence
described in Table 6-20. For the method of performing the CME single configuration, see
CME Single Configuration Operation Guide.
Step 2 (Optional) Modify objects in batches on the CME. (CME batch modification center)

To modify objects, such as BSCs, BTSs, cells, and TRXs, in batches, click the icon on the
CME configuration interface to start the batch modification wizard. For the method of
performing batch modifications through the CME batch modification center, press F1 on the
wizard interface to obtain online help.

----End

Table 6-20 Configuring the parameter on the CME


SN MO NE Parameter Parameter Configura
Name ID ble in CME
Batch
Modificati
on Center

1 GCELLOT BSC6900/ Power Boost HOPOWER Yes


HBASIC BSC6910 before HO BOOST
Enabled or
Not

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 176


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

7 Parameters

Table 7-1 Parameters


Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description
ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

HoCDC BSC690 SET None None Meaning: Whether a call can be handed over to an
OverLo 0 GCELL overloaded candidate cell.
deHoEn HOBAS GUI Value Range: NO(No), YES(Yes)
IC
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO, YES
Default Value: NO(No)

HoCDC BSC691 SET None None Meaning: Whether a call can be handed over to an
OverLo 0 GCELL overloaded candidate cell.
deHoEn HOBAS GUI Value Range: NO(No), YES(Yes)
IC
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO, YES
Default Value: NO(No)

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 177


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

BqNCel BSC690 ADD GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning:


lAbsTh 0 G2GNC 10601 EI I Whether to use an absolute threshold when the BSC
resSw ELL Handov selects a neighboring cell during a BQ handover.
MOD er When this parameter is set to ON, an absolute
G2GNC threshold is used. The absolute threshold is calculated
ELL as follows:
Absolute threshold = Value of "HOTHRES" + Value
of "BQMARGIN" - 64
When this parameter is set to OFF, a relative threshold
is used. The relative threshold is calculated as follows:
Relative threshold = Downlink receive level of the
serving cell after power control compensation + Value
of "INTERCELLHYST" - Value of "BQMARGIN"
GUI Value Range: OFF(Off), ON(On)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: OFF, ON
Default Value: OFF(Off)

BqNCel BSC691 ADD GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning:


lAbsTh 0 G2GNC 10601 EI I Whether to use an absolute threshold when the BSC
resSw ELL Handov selects a neighboring cell during a BQ handover.
MOD er When this parameter is set to ON, an absolute
G2GNC threshold is used. The absolute threshold is calculated
ELL as follows:
Absolute threshold = Value of "HOTHRES" + Value
of "BQMARGIN" - 64
When this parameter is set to OFF, a relative threshold
is used. The relative threshold is calculated as follows:
Relative threshold = Downlink receive level of the
serving cell after power control compensation + Value
of "INTERCELLHYST" - Value of "BQMARGIN"
GUI Value Range: OFF(Off), ON(On)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: OFF, ON
Default Value: OFF(Off)

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 178


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

SIGST BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Number of measurement reports used for
RFLTL 0 GCELL 10601 EI I averaging the signal strength of signaling channels.
EN HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov This parameter helps avoid sharp drop of signal levels
PEN 10501 er caused by Raileigh fading and to ensure correct
HUAW handover decisions.
EI II GUI Value Range: 1~31
Handov Unit: 470ms; 480ms
er
Actual Value Range: 480~14880(TCH);
470~14570(SDCCH)
Default Value: 2

SIGST BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Number of measurement reports used for
RFLTL 0 GCELL 10601 EI I averaging the signal strength of signaling channels.
EN HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov This parameter helps avoid sharp drop of signal levels
PEN 10501 er caused by Raileigh fading and to ensure correct
HUAW handover decisions.
EI II GUI Value Range: 1~31
Handov Unit: 470ms; 480ms
er
Actual Value Range: 480~14880(TCH);
470~14570(SDCCH)
Default Value: 2

DATAS BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Number of measurement reports sampled
TRFLT 0 GCELL 10601 EI I for averaging the signal strength on a speech or data
LEN HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov channel. Averaging the signal strength in multiple
PEN 10501 er measurement reports helps to prevent sharp
HUAW deterioration of the signal level due to Rayleigh fading
EI II and to ensure a comprehensive handover decision.
Handov GUI Value Range: 1~31
er Unit: 480ms
Actual Value Range: 480~14880
Default Value: 4

DATAS BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Number of measurement reports sampled
TRFLT 0 GCELL 10601 EI I for averaging the signal strength on a speech or data
LEN HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov channel. Averaging the signal strength in multiple
PEN 10501 er measurement reports helps to prevent sharp
HUAW deterioration of the signal level due to Rayleigh fading
EI II and to ensure a comprehensive handover decision.
Handov GUI Value Range: 1~31
er Unit: 480ms
Actual Value Range: 480~14880
Default Value: 4

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 179


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

SIGQU BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Number of measurement reports used for
AFLTL 0 GCELL 10601 EI I averaging the signal quality of signaling channels.
EN HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov This parameter helps avoid sharp drop of signal levels
PEN 10501 er caused by Raileigh fading and to ensure correct
HUAW handover decisions.
EI II GUI Value Range: 1~31
Handov Unit: 470ms; 480ms
er
Actual Value Range: 480~14880(TCH);
470~14570(SDCCH)
Default Value: 2

SIGQU BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Number of measurement reports used for
AFLTL 0 GCELL 10601 EI I averaging the signal quality of signaling channels.
EN HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov This parameter helps avoid sharp drop of signal levels
PEN 10501 er caused by Raileigh fading and to ensure correct
HUAW handover decisions.
EI II GUI Value Range: 1~31
Handov Unit: 470ms; 480ms
er
Actual Value Range: 480~14880(TCH);
470~14570(SDCCH)
Default Value: 2

DATAQ BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Number of measurement reports sampled
UAFLT 0 GCELL 10601 EI I for averaging the signal quality on a speech or data
LEN HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov channel. Averaging the signal quality in multiple
PEN 10501 er measurement reports helps to prevent sharp
HUAW deterioration of the signal quality due to Rayleigh
EI II fading and to ensure a comprehensive handover
Handov decision.
er GUI Value Range: 1~31
Unit: 480ms
Actual Value Range: 480~14880
Default Value: 4

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 180


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

DATAQ BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Number of measurement reports sampled
UAFLT 0 GCELL 10601 EI I for averaging the signal quality on a speech or data
LEN HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov channel. Averaging the signal quality in multiple
PEN 10501 er measurement reports helps to prevent sharp
HUAW deterioration of the signal quality due to Rayleigh
EI II fading and to ensure a comprehensive handover
Handov decision.
er GUI Value Range: 1~31
Unit: 480ms
Actual Value Range: 480~14880
Default Value: 4

TAFLT BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: When the network receives measurement
LEN 0 GCELL 10601 EI I reports, the measurement values in several straight
HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov measurement reports are filtered to reflect the radio
PEN 10501 er operating environment for the sake of accuracy. This
HUAW parameter specifies the number of measurement
EI II reports sampled for filtering the TA on TCHs.
Handov GUI Value Range: 1~31
er Unit: 470ms; 480ms
Actual Value Range: 480~14880(TCH);
470~14570(SDCCH)
Default Value: 4

TAFLT BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: When the network receives measurement
LEN 0 GCELL 10601 EI I reports, the measurement values in several straight
HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov measurement reports are filtered to reflect the radio
PEN 10501 er operating environment for the sake of accuracy. This
HUAW parameter specifies the number of measurement
EI II reports sampled for filtering the TA on TCHs.
Handov GUI Value Range: 1~31
er Unit: 470ms; 480ms
Actual Value Range: 480~14880(TCH);
470~14570(SDCCH)
Default Value: 4

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 181


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

TASIG BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: When the network receives measurement
STRFL 0 GCELL 10601 EI I reports, the measurement values in several straight
TLEN HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov measurement reports are filtered to reflect the radio
PEN 10501 er operating environment for the sake of accuracy. This
HUAW parameter specifies the number of measurement
EI II reports sampled for filtering the TA on the signaling
Handov channel.
er GUI Value Range: 1~31
Unit: 470ms; 480ms
Actual Value Range: 480~14880(TCH);
470~14570(SDCCH)
Default Value: 2

TASIG BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: When the network receives measurement
STRFL 0 GCELL 10601 EI I reports, the measurement values in several straight
TLEN HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov measurement reports are filtered to reflect the radio
PEN 10501 er operating environment for the sake of accuracy. This
HUAW parameter specifies the number of measurement
EI II reports sampled for filtering the TA on the signaling
Handov channel.
er GUI Value Range: 1~31
Unit: 470ms; 480ms
Actual Value Range: 480~14880(TCH);
470~14570(SDCCH)
Default Value: 2

NCELL BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: For the purpose of accurately reflecting the
FLTLE 0 GCELL 10601 EI I radio environment of a network, the measured values
N HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov in several consecutive measurement reports are
PEN 10501 er filtered. This parameter indicates the number of
HUAW measurement reports used when filtering is performed
EI II on neighboring cell signal strength measured on
Handov TCHs.
er GUI Value Range: 1~31
Unit: 470ms; 480ms
Actual Value Range: 480~14880(TCH);
470~14570(SDCCH)
Default Value: 4

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 182


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

NCELL BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: For the purpose of accurately reflecting the
FLTLE 0 GCELL 10601 EI I radio environment of a network, the measured values
N HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov in several consecutive measurement reports are
PEN 10501 er filtered. This parameter indicates the number of
HUAW measurement reports used when filtering is performed
EI II on neighboring cell signal strength measured on
Handov TCHs.
er GUI Value Range: 1~31
Unit: 470ms; 480ms
Actual Value Range: 480~14880(TCH);
470~14570(SDCCH)
Default Value: 4

NSIGS BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: For the purpose of accurately reflecting the
TRFLT 0 GCELL 10601 EI I radio environment of a network, filtering is performed
LEN HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov on the measured values in several consecutive
PEN 10501 er measurement reports. This parameter indicates the
HUAW number of measurement reports received on signaling
EI II channels used for the filtering of neighboring cell
Handov signal strength.
er GUI Value Range: 1~31
Unit: 470ms; 480ms
Actual Value Range: 480~14880(TCH);
470~14570(SDCCH)
Default Value: 2

NSIGS BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: For the purpose of accurately reflecting the
TRFLT 0 GCELL 10601 EI I radio environment of a network, filtering is performed
LEN HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov on the measured values in several consecutive
PEN 10501 er measurement reports. This parameter indicates the
HUAW number of measurement reports received on signaling
EI II channels used for the filtering of neighboring cell
Handov signal strength.
er GUI Value Range: 1~31
Unit: 470ms; 480ms
Actual Value Range: 480~14880(TCH);
470~14570(SDCCH)
Default Value: 2

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 183


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

HOCT BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Whether to use handover algorithm
RLSWI 0 GCELL 10601 EI I generation 1 or 2 currently.
TCH HOBAS Handov GUI Value Range: HOALGORITHM1(Handover
IC er algorithm I), HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm
II)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: HOALGORITHM1,
HOALGORITHM2
Default Value: HOALGORITHM1(Handover
algorithm I)

HOCT BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Whether to use handover algorithm
RLSWI 0 GCELL 10601 EI I generation 1 or 2 currently.
TCH HOBAS Handov GUI Value Range: HOALGORITHM1(Handover
IC er algorithm I), HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm
II)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: HOALGORITHM1,
HOALGORITHM2
Default Value: HOALGORITHM1(Handover
algorithm I)

DIRMA BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Whether a cell is served by a repeater. With
GANSI 0 GCELL 10601 EI I simpler functions than a BTS, a repeater is a coverage
TEFLA SOFT Handov extension device of a BTS. It is applicable to widely-
G er stretched areas or indoor areas to solve the BTS
coverage hole problem. Using repeaters cannot
expand the traffic capacity of a network but improve
the coverage only. Because the BTS coverage
increases, the total traffic improves accordingly. The
setting of this parameter affects handovers. Repeaters
use the asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) due to a
long distance between them. Therefore, handovers
between repeaters or between repeaters and other
devices are asynchronous. Synchronous handovers
cannot be performed.
GUI Value Range: NO(No), YES(Yes)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO, YES
Default Value: NO(No)

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 184


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

DIRMA BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Whether a cell is served by a repeater. With
GANSI 0 GCELL 10601 EI I simpler functions than a BTS, a repeater is a coverage
TEFLA SOFT Handov extension device of a BTS. It is applicable to widely-
G er stretched areas or indoor areas to solve the BTS
coverage hole problem. Using repeaters cannot
expand the traffic capacity of a network but improve
the coverage only. Because the BTS coverage
increases, the total traffic improves accordingly. The
setting of this parameter affects handovers. Repeaters
use the asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) due to a
long distance between them. Therefore, handovers
between repeaters or between repeaters and other
devices are asynchronous. Synchronous handovers
cannot be performed.
GUI Value Range: NO(No), YES(Yes)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO, YES
Default Value: NO(No)

FRAM BSC690 SET MRFD- Configu Meaning: Frame offset. The frame offset technology
EOFFS 0 GCELL 210301 ration arranges the frame numbers of different cells under
ET OTHE Manage the same BTS to be different from one another by one
XT ment frame offset. Thus, the FCH and SCH signals of
neighboring cells do not appear in the same frame,
which is helpful for the coding of an MS. If the value
of this parameter is 0, the cell is not offset. If the value
is 255, this parameter is not sent. If the parameter is
set to a value except for 0 and 255, the handover of
the cell must be changed from the synchronous mode
to the asynchronous mode. For BTS3001C, BTS3X,
BTS3002C and double-transceiver BTSs, the frame
offset can be predicted according to the value of this
parameter.
GUI Value Range: 0~255
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~255
Default Value: 0

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 185


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

FRAM BSC691 SET MRFD- Configu Meaning: Frame offset. The frame offset technology
EOFFS 0 GCELL 210301 ration arranges the frame numbers of different cells under
ET OTHE Manage the same BTS to be different from one another by one
XT ment frame offset. Thus, the FCH and SCH signals of
neighboring cells do not appear in the same frame,
which is helpful for the coding of an MS. If the value
of this parameter is 0, the cell is not offset. If the value
is 255, this parameter is not sent. If the parameter is
set to a value except for 0 and 255, the handover of
the cell must be changed from the synchronous mode
to the asynchronous mode. For double-transceiver
BTSs, the frame offset can be predicted according to
the value of this parameter.
GUI Value Range: 0~255
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~255
Default Value: 0

BTSME BSC690 SET GBFD-1 Pre- Meaning: Whether to enable the BTS to preprocess
SRPTP 0 GCELL 10802 processi measurement reports. This parameter determines
REPRO HOCT ng of where to conduct power control.
C RL Measure GUI Value Range: BSC_Preprocessing(BSC
ment preprocessing), BTS_Preprocessing(BTS
Report preprocessing)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: BSC_Preprocessing,
BTS_Preprocessing
Default Value: BSC_Preprocessing(BSC
preprocessing)

BTSME BSC691 SET GBFD-1 Pre- Meaning: Whether to enable the BTS to preprocess
SRPTP 0 GCELL 10802 processi measurement reports. This parameter determines
REPRO HOCT ng of where to conduct power control.
C RL Measure GUI Value Range: BSC_Preprocessing(BSC
ment preprocessing), BTS_Preprocessing(BTS
Report preprocessing)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: BSC_Preprocessing,
BTS_Preprocessing
Default Value: BSC_Preprocessing(BSC
preprocessing)

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 186


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

PRIM BSC690 SET GBFD-1 Pre- Meaning: Whether the BTSs send the original
MESPP 0 GCELL 10802 processi measurement reports to the BSC after pre-processing
T HOCT ng of them. When this parameter is set to YES, the BTSs
RL Measure send the original and pre-processed measurement
ment reports to the BSC.
Report GUI Value Range: NO(No), YES(Yes)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO, YES
Default Value: NO(No)

PRIM BSC691 SET GBFD-1 Pre- Meaning: Whether the BTSs send the original
MESPP 0 GCELL 10802 processi measurement reports to the BSC after pre-processing
T HOCT ng of them. When this parameter is set to YES, the BTSs
RL Measure send the original and pre-processed measurement
ment reports to the BSC.
Report GUI Value Range: NO(No), YES(Yes)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO, YES
Default Value: NO(No)

BSMSP BSC690 SET GBFD-1 Pre- Meaning: Whether to enable the BTS to transfer
WRLE 0 GCELL 10802 processi BTS/MS power class to the BSC
V HOCT ng of GUI Value Range: NO(No), YES(Yes)
RL Measure
ment Unit: None
Report Actual Value Range: NO, YES
Default Value: YES(Yes)

BSMSP BSC691 SET GBFD-1 Pre- Meaning: Whether to enable the BTS to transfer
WRLE 0 GCELL 10802 processi BTS/MS power class to the BSC
V HOCT ng of GUI Value Range: NO(No), YES(Yes)
RL Measure
ment Unit: None
Report Actual Value Range: NO, YES
Default Value: YES(Yes)

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 187


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

MRPR BSC690 SET GBFD-1 Pre- Meaning: Frequency at which the BTSs submit pre-
EPROC 0 GCELL 10802 processi processed measurement reports to the BSC
FREQ HOCT ng of GUI Value Range: NOreport(Do not report),
RL Measure Twice_ps(Twice every second), Once_ps(Once every
ment second), Once_2s(Once every two second),
Report Once_4s(Once every four second)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NOreport, Twice_ps, Once_ps,
Once_2s, Once_4s
Default Value: Twice_ps(Twice every second)

MRPR BSC691 SET GBFD-1 Pre- Meaning: Frequency at which the BTSs submit pre-
EPROC 0 GCELL 10802 processi processed measurement reports to the BSC
FREQ HOCT ng of GUI Value Range: NOreport(Do not report),
RL Measure Twice_ps(Twice every second), Once_ps(Once every
ment second), Once_2s(Once every two second),
Report Once_4s(Once every four second)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NOreport, Twice_ps, Once_ps,
Once_2s, Once_4s
Default Value: Twice_ps(Twice every second)

MEAS BSC690 SET GBFD-1 Processi Meaning: Type of the measurement report (MR)
URETY 0 GCELL 10801 ng of reported by the MS
PE CCUTR GBFD-1 Measure GUI Value Range: EnhMeasReport(Enhanced
ANSYS 17501 ment Measurement Report), ComMeasReport(Common
Report Measurement Report)
GBFD-1
10802 Enhance Unit: None
d
Measure Actual Value Range: EnhMeasReport,
ment ComMeasReport
Report Default Value: ComMeasReport(Common
(EMR) Measurement Report)
Pre-
processi
ng of
Measure
ment
Report

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 188


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

MEAS BSC691 SET GBFD-1 Processi Meaning: Type of the measurement report (MR)
URETY 0 GCELL 10801 ng of reported by the MS
PE CCUTR GBFD-1 Measure GUI Value Range: EnhMeasReport(Enhanced
ANSYS 17501 ment Measurement Report), ComMeasReport(Common
Report Measurement Report)
GBFD-1
10802 Enhance Unit: None
d
Measure Actual Value Range: EnhMeasReport,
ment ComMeasReport
Report Default Value: ComMeasReport(Common
(EMR) Measurement Report)
Pre-
processi
ng of
Measure
ment
Report

MRMIS BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Allowed number of measurement reports
SCOUN 0 GCELL 10601 EI I lost consecutively during interpolation. If the number
T HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov of measurement reports lost consecutively is less than
PEN 10501 er or equal to the value of this parameter, linear
HUAW interpolation is performed for the values in the lost
EI II measurement reports based on the values in the two
Handov measurement reports following and followed by the
er lost measurement reports. If the number of
measurement reports lost consecutively is greater than
the value of this parameter, all measurement reports
before the lost measurement reports will be discarded,
and the relevant filtering values will be recalculated
when new measurement reports are received.
GUI Value Range: 0~31
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~31
Default Value: 4

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 189


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

MRMIS BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Allowed number of measurement reports
SCOUN 0 GCELL 10601 EI I lost consecutively during interpolation. If the number
T HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov of measurement reports lost consecutively is less than
PEN 10501 er or equal to the value of this parameter, linear
HUAW interpolation is performed for the values in the lost
EI II measurement reports based on the values in the two
Handov measurement reports following and followed by the
er lost measurement reports. If the number of
measurement reports lost consecutively is greater than
the value of this parameter, all measurement reports
before the lost measurement reports will be discarded,
and the relevant filtering values will be recalculated
when new measurement reports are received.
GUI Value Range: 0~31
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~31
Default Value: 4

MrIntr BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning:


plOptS 0 GCELL 10601 EI I Whether to enable measurement report (MR)
witch HOBAS GBFD-5 Handov interpolation optimization when MRs are lost.
IC 10501 er
This parameter is effective for handover algorithms I
HUAW and II. If this parameter is set to YES for the BSC
EI II where handover algorithm I is used, the interpolation
Handov mode of the neighboring cells is changed to linear
er interpolation. If this parameter is set to YES for the
BSC where handover algorithm II is used, the
interpolation mode of the serving cell and the
neighboring cells is changed to linear interpolation.
GUI Value Range: NO(No), YES(Yes)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO, YES
Default Value: NO(No)

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 190


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

MrIntr BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning:


plOptS 0 GCELL 10601 EI I Whether to enable measurement report (MR)
witch HOBAS GBFD-5 Handov interpolation optimization when MRs are lost.
IC 10501 er
This parameter is effective for handover algorithms I
HUAW and II. If this parameter is set to YES for the BSC
EI II where handover algorithm I is used, the interpolation
Handov mode of the neighboring cells is changed to linear
er interpolation. If this parameter is set to YES for the
BSC where handover algorithm II is used, the
interpolation mode of the serving cell and the
neighboring cells is changed to linear interpolation.
GUI Value Range: NO(No), YES(Yes)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO, YES
Default Value: NO(No)

SSLEN BSC690 SET GBFD-1 Enhance Meaning: When the network receives measurement
SD 0 GCELL 11005 d reports, the measurement values in several straight
CHMG Channel measurement reports are filtered to reflect the radio
AD Assignm operating environment for the sake of accuracy. This
ent parameter specifies the number of successive
Algorith measurement reports that are used to determine the
m signal strength on traffic/data channels. This
parameter is used to determine whether interferences
exist on channels.
GUI Value Range: 1~32
Unit: 480ms
Actual Value Range: 480~15360
Default Value: 6

SSLEN BSC691 SET GBFD-1 Enhance Meaning: When the network receives measurement
SD 0 GCELL 11005 d reports, the measurement values in several straight
CHMG Channel measurement reports are filtered to reflect the radio
AD Assignm operating environment for the sake of accuracy. This
ent parameter specifies the number of successive
Algorith measurement reports that are used to determine the
m signal strength on traffic/data channels. This
parameter is used to determine whether interferences
exist on channels.
GUI Value Range: 1~32
Unit: 480ms
Actual Value Range: 480~15360
Default Value: 6

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 191


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

QLENS BSC690 SET GBFD-1 Enhance Meaning: For the purpose of accurately reflecting the
I 0 GCELL 11005 d radio environment of a network, filtering is performed
CHMG Channel on the measured values in several consecutive
AD Assignm measurement reports. This parameter indicates the
ent number of measurement reports used for the filtering
Algorith of the signal quality on signaling channels. This
m parameter is used to determine whether interferences
exist on channels.
GUI Value Range: 1~32
Unit: 470ms; 480ms
Actual Value Range: 480~15360(TCH);
470~15040(SDCCH)
Default Value: 2

QLENS BSC691 SET GBFD-1 Enhance Meaning: For the purpose of accurately reflecting the
I 0 GCELL 11005 d radio environment of a network, filtering is performed
CHMG Channel on the measured values in several consecutive
AD Assignm measurement reports. This parameter indicates the
ent number of measurement reports used for the filtering
Algorith of the signal quality on signaling channels. This
m parameter is used to determine whether interferences
exist on channels.
GUI Value Range: 1~32
Unit: 470ms; 480ms
Actual Value Range: 480~15360(TCH);
470~15040(SDCCH)
Default Value: 2

QLENS BSC690 SET GBFD-1 Enhance Meaning: For the purpose of accurately reflecting the
D 0 GCELL 11005 d radio environment of a network, filtering is performed
CHMG Channel on the measured values in several consecutive
AD Assignm measurement reports. This parameter indicates the
ent number of measurement reports used for the filtering
Algorith of the signal quality on service or data channels. This
m parameter is used to determine whether interferences
exist on channels.
GUI Value Range: 1~32
Unit: 480ms
Actual Value Range: 480~15360
Default Value: 6

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 192


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

QLENS BSC691 SET GBFD-1 Enhance Meaning: For the purpose of accurately reflecting the
D 0 GCELL 11005 d radio environment of a network, filtering is performed
CHMG Channel on the measured values in several consecutive
AD Assignm measurement reports. This parameter indicates the
ent number of measurement reports used for the filtering
Algorith of the signal quality on service or data channels. This
m parameter is used to determine whether interferences
exist on channels.
GUI Value Range: 1~32
Unit: 480ms
Actual Value Range: 480~15360
Default Value: 6

TIMEP BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: After the fast handover is successful, the
UNISH 0 GCELL 10601 EI I penalty on the original serving cell is performed
HOFAS GBFD-5 Handov within the "Quick handover punish time": the receive
T 10501 er level of the original serving cell is decreased by
HUAW "Quick handover punish value", to prevent ping-pong
EI II handovers.
Handov GUI Value Range: 0~255
er Unit: s
Actual Value Range: 0~255
Default Value: 10

TIMEP BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: After the fast handover is successful, the
UNISH 0 GCELL 10601 EI I penalty on the original serving cell is performed
HOFAS GBFD-5 Handov within the "Quick handover punish time": the receive
T 10501 er level of the original serving cell is decreased by
HUAW "Quick handover punish value", to prevent ping-pong
EI II handovers.
Handov GUI Value Range: 0~255
er Unit: s
Actual Value Range: 0~255
Default Value: 10

HOPU BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: To avoid ping-pong handover, the received
NISHV 0 GCELL 10601 EI I signal of the original serving cell is decreased by
ALUE HOFAS GBFD-5 Handov "Quick handover punish value" in "Quick handover
T 10501 er punish time" after fast handover succeeds.
HUAW GUI Value Range: 0~63
EI II Unit: dB
Handov
er Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 63

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 193


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

HOPU BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: To avoid ping-pong handover, the received
NISHV 0 GCELL 10601 EI I signal of the original serving cell is decreased by
ALUE HOFAS GBFD-5 Handov "Quick handover punish value" in "Quick handover
T 10501 er punish time" after fast handover succeeds.
HUAW GUI Value Range: 0~63
EI II Unit: dB
Handov
er Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 63

QuickH BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Whether to punish the fast handover. Fast
oPunish 0 GCELL 10601 EI I handover punish aims to decrease the handover
Sw HOFAS GBFD-5 Handov priority of the source cell after the call hands over to
T 10501 er the target cell from the source cell to avoid ping-pang
HUAW handover. If this parameter is set to OFF(Off) and
EI II "TIMEPUNISH" or "HOPUNISHVALUE" is set to 0,
Handov the BSC does not punish the fast handover. If this
er parameter is set to ON(On) and "TIMEPUNISH" and
"HOPUNISHVALUE" are set to a value other than 0,
the BSC punishes the fast handover.
GUI Value Range: OFF(Off), ON(On)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: OFF, ON
Default Value: ON(On)

QuickH BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Whether to punish the fast handover. Fast
oPunish 0 GCELL 10601 EI I handover punish aims to decrease the handover
Sw HOFAS GBFD-5 Handov priority of the source cell after the call hands over to
T 10501 er the target cell from the source cell to avoid ping-pang
HUAW handover. If this parameter is set to OFF(Off) and
EI II "TIMEPUNISH" or "HOPUNISHVALUE" is set to 0,
Handov the BSC does not punish the fast handover. If this
er parameter is set to ON(On) and "TIMEPUNISH" and
"HOPUNISHVALUE" are set to a value other than 0,
the BSC punishes the fast handover.
GUI Value Range: OFF(Off), ON(On)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: OFF, ON
Default Value: ON(On)

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 194


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

SSTAP BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: After the time advancing handover is
UNISH 0 GCELL 10601 EI I successful, the penalty on the original serving cell is
HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov performed within the "Penalty Time after TA HO": the
PEN 10501 er receive level of the original serving cell is decreased
HUAW by "Penalty Level after TA HO", to prevent ping-pong
EI II handovers.
Handov GUI Value Range: 0~63
er Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 63

SSTAP BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: After the time advancing handover is
UNISH 0 GCELL 10601 EI I successful, the penalty on the original serving cell is
HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov performed within the "Penalty Time after TA HO": the
PEN 10501 er receive level of the original serving cell is decreased
HUAW by "Penalty Level after TA HO", to prevent ping-pong
EI II handovers.
Handov GUI Value Range: 0~63
er Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 63

TIMET BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: After the time advancing handover is
APUNI 0 GCELL 10601 EI I successful, the penalty on the original serving cell is
SH HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov performed within the "Penalty Time after TA HO": the
PEN 10501 er receive level of the original serving cell is decreased
HUAW by "Penalty Level after TA HO", to prevent ping-pong
EI II handovers.
Handov GUI Value Range: 0~255
er Unit: s
Actual Value Range: 0~255
Default Value: 30

TIMET BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: After the time advancing handover is
APUNI 0 GCELL 10601 EI I successful, the penalty on the original serving cell is
SH HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov performed within the "Penalty Time after TA HO": the
PEN 10501 er receive level of the original serving cell is decreased
HUAW by "Penalty Level after TA HO", to prevent ping-pong
EI II handovers.
Handov GUI Value Range: 0~255
er Unit: s
Actual Value Range: 0~255
Default Value: 30

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 195


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

SSBQP BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: After a successful handover due to bad
UNISH 0 GCELL 10601 EI I quality or insufficient TRX power, the penalty on the
HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov original serving cell is performed within the "Penalty
PEN 10501 er Time after BQ HO": the receive level of the original
HUAW serving cell is decreased by "Penalty Level after BQ
EI II HO", to prevent ping-pong handovers.
Handov GUI Value Range: 0~63
er Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 63

SSBQP BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: After a successful handover due to bad
UNISH 0 GCELL 10601 EI I quality or insufficient TRX power, the penalty on the
HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov original serving cell is performed within the "Penalty
PEN 10501 er Time after BQ HO": the receive level of the original
HUAW serving cell is decreased by "Penalty Level after BQ
EI II HO", to prevent ping-pong handovers.
Handov GUI Value Range: 0~63
er Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 63

TIMEB BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: After a successful handover due to bad
QPUNI 0 GCELL 10601 EI I quality or insufficient TRX power, the penalty on the
SH HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov original serving cell is performed within the time
PEN 10501 er specified by "Penalty Time after BQ HO". That is, the
HUAW receive level of the original serving cell is decreased
EI II by "Penalty Level after BQ HO". This prevents ping-
Handov pong handovers.
er GUI Value Range: 0~255
Unit: s
Actual Value Range: 0~255
Default Value: 10

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 196


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

TIMEB BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: After a successful handover due to bad
QPUNI 0 GCELL 10601 EI I quality or insufficient TRX power, the penalty on the
SH HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov original serving cell is performed within the time
PEN 10501 er specified by "Penalty Time after BQ HO". That is, the
HUAW receive level of the original serving cell is decreased
EI II by "Penalty Level after BQ HO". This prevents ping-
Handov pong handovers.
er GUI Value Range: 0~255
Unit: s
Actual Value Range: 0~255
Default Value: 10

LOAD BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: After a load handover succeeds, the BSC
HOPEN 0 GCELL 10601 EI I punishes the former serving cell during "Penalty Time
TIME HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov on Load HO" by subtracting "Penalty Value on Load
PEN 10501 er HO" from the receive level of the former serving cell,
HUAW thus avoiding ping-pong handovers.
EI II GUI Value Range: 0~255
Handov Unit: s
er
Actual Value Range: 0~255
Default Value: 10

LOAD BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: After a load handover succeeds, the BSC
HOPEN 0 GCELL 10601 EI I punishes the former serving cell during "Penalty Time
TIME HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov on Load HO" by subtracting "Penalty Value on Load
PEN 10501 er HO" from the receive level of the former serving cell,
HUAW thus avoiding ping-pong handovers.
EI II GUI Value Range: 0~255
Handov Unit: s
er
Actual Value Range: 0~255
Default Value: 10

LOAD BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: After a load handover succeeds, the BSC
HOPEN 0 GCELL 10601 EI I punishes the former serving cell during "Penalty Time
VALUE HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov on Load HO" by subtracting "Penalty Value on Load
PEN 10501 er HO" from the receive level of the former serving cell,
HUAW thus avoiding ping-pong handovers.
EI II GUI Value Range: 0~63
Handov Unit: dB
er
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 63

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 197


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

LOAD BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: After a load handover succeeds, the BSC
HOPEN 0 GCELL 10601 EI I punishes the former serving cell during "Penalty Time
VALUE HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov on Load HO" by subtracting "Penalty Value on Load
PEN 10501 er HO" from the receive level of the former serving cell,
HUAW thus avoiding ping-pong handovers.
EI II GUI Value Range: 0~63
Handov Unit: dB
er
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 63

LoadHo BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Whether to enable penalty inheritance for
PunishI 0 GCELL 10601 EI I load-based handovers. With the handover penalty
nheritS HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov inheritance function, the penalty list will be
witch PEN 10501 er transferred to the target cell along with a call
HUAW handover.
EI II GUI Value Range: OFF(Off), ON(On)
Handov Unit: None
er
Actual Value Range: OFF, ON
Default Value: OFF(Off)

LoadHo BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Whether to enable penalty inheritance for
PunishI 0 GCELL 10601 EI I load-based handovers. With the handover penalty
nheritS HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov inheritance function, the penalty list will be
witch PEN 10501 er transferred to the target cell along with a call
HUAW handover.
EI II GUI Value Range: OFF(Off), ON(On)
Handov Unit: None
er
Actual Value Range: OFF, ON
Default Value: OFF(Off)

SPEED BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Level value of the penalty that is performed
PUNIS 0 GCELL 10601 EI I on the neighboring cells of the cell where a fast-
H HOAD GBFD-5 Handov moving MS is located. The neighboring cells must be
10501 er located at the Macro, Micro, or Pico layer other than
HUAW the Umbrella layer.
EI II GUI Value Range: 0~63
Handov Unit: dB
er
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 30

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 198


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

SPEED BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Level value of the penalty that is performed
PUNIS 0 GCELL 10601 EI I on the neighboring cells of the cell where a fast-
H HOAD GBFD-5 Handov moving MS is located. The neighboring cells must be
10501 er located at the Macro, Micro, or Pico layer other than
HUAW the Umbrella layer.
EI II GUI Value Range: 0~63
Handov Unit: dB
er
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 30

SPEED BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Period in which penalty is performed on the
PUNIS 0 GCELL 10601 EI I neighboring cells of the cell where a fast-moving MS
HT HOAD GBFD-5 Handov is located. The neighboring cells must be located at
10501 er the Macro, Micro, or Pico layer but not the Umbrella
HUAW layer.
EI II GUI Value Range: 0~255
Handov Unit: s
er
Actual Value Range: 0~255
Default Value: 40

SPEED BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Period in which penalty is performed on the
PUNIS 0 GCELL 10601 EI I neighboring cells of the cell where a fast-moving MS
HT HOAD GBFD-5 Handov is located. The neighboring cells must be located at
10501 er the Macro, Micro, or Pico layer but not the Umbrella
HUAW layer.
EI II GUI Value Range: 0~255
Handov Unit: s
er
Actual Value Range: 0~255
Default Value: 40

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 199


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

TIMEA BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning:


MRFH 0 GCELL 10601 EI I Period during which the corresponding handover
PUNIS HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov cannot be performed again if one of the following
H PEN 10501 er handovers fails:
HUAW 1. AMR TCHF-TCHH handovers (including TCHF-
EI II TCHH handovers for Huawei handover algorithm I,
Handov TCHF-TCHH handovers for Huawei handover
er algorithm II, and TCHF-TCHH handovers based on
capacity and quality for Huawei handover algorithm I)
2. AMR TCHH-TCHF handovers (including TCHH-
TCHF handovers for Huawei handover algorithm I,
TCHH-TCHF handovers for Huawei handover
algorithm II, and TCHH-TCHF handovers based on
capacity and quality for Huawei handover algorithm I)
3. Non-AMR TCHF-TCHH handovers (including
non-AMR TCHF-TCHH handovers for Huawei
handover algorithm I, non-AMR TCHF-TCHH
handovers for Huawei handover algorithm II, and
non-AMR TCHF-TCHH handovers based on capacity
and quality for Huawei handover algorithm I)
4. Non-AMR TCHH-TCHF handovers (including
non-AMR TCHH-TCHF handovers for Huawei
handover algorithm I, non-AMR TCHH-TCHF
handovers for Huawei handover algorithm II, and
non-AMR TCHH-TCHF handovers based on capacity
and quality for Huawei handover algorithm I)
5. Handovers triggered by TCHH integration.
GUI Value Range: 0~255
Unit: s
Actual Value Range: 0~255
Default Value: 10

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 200


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

TIMEA BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning:


MRFH 0 GCELL 10601 EI I Period during which the corresponding handover
PUNIS HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov cannot be performed again if one of the following
H PEN 10501 er handovers fails:
HUAW 1. AMR TCHF-TCHH handovers (including TCHF-
EI II TCHH handovers for Huawei handover algorithm I,
Handov TCHF-TCHH handovers for Huawei handover
er algorithm II, and TCHF-TCHH handovers based on
capacity and quality for Huawei handover algorithm I)
2. AMR TCHH-TCHF handovers (including TCHH-
TCHF handovers for Huawei handover algorithm I,
TCHH-TCHF handovers for Huawei handover
algorithm II, and TCHH-TCHF handovers based on
capacity and quality for Huawei handover algorithm I)
3. Non-AMR TCHF-TCHH handovers (including
non-AMR TCHF-TCHH handovers for Huawei
handover algorithm I, non-AMR TCHF-TCHH
handovers for Huawei handover algorithm II, and
non-AMR TCHF-TCHH handovers based on capacity
and quality for Huawei handover algorithm I)
4. Non-AMR TCHH-TCHF handovers (including
non-AMR TCHH-TCHF handovers for Huawei
handover algorithm I, non-AMR TCHH-TCHF
handovers for Huawei handover algorithm II, and
non-AMR TCHH-TCHF handovers based on capacity
and quality for Huawei handover algorithm I)
5. Handovers triggered by TCHH integration.
GUI Value Range: 0~255
Unit: s
Actual Value Range: 0~255
Default Value: 10

INTER BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Period in which interference handovers are
FEREH 0 GCELL 10601 EI I not allowed after a successful or failed interference
OPENT HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov handover is performed.
IME PEN 10501 er GUI Value Range: 0~255
HUAW Unit: s
EI II
Handov Actual Value Range: 0~255
er Default Value: 15

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 201


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

INTER BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Period in which interference handovers are
FEREH 0 GCELL 10601 EI I not allowed after a successful or failed interference
OPENT HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov handover is performed.
IME PEN 10501 er GUI Value Range: 0~255
HUAW Unit: s
EI II
Handov Actual Value Range: 0~255
er Default Value: 15

UTOO BSC690 SET GBFD-1 Concent Meaning: In enhanced concentric cells, after an MS
HOPEN 0 GCELL 13201 ric Cell successfully performs an overlaid-to-underlaid
TIME HOIUO handover, the MS cannot be handed over back to the
overlaid subcell within the duration specified by this
parameter.
GUI Value Range: 0~255
Unit: s
Actual Value Range: 0~255
Default Value: 10

UTOO BSC691 SET GBFD-1 Concent Meaning: In enhanced concentric cells, after an MS
HOPEN 0 GCELL 13201 ric Cell successfully performs an overlaid-to-underlaid
TIME HOIUO handover, the MS cannot be handed over back to the
overlaid subcell within the duration specified by this
parameter.
GUI Value Range: 0~255
Unit: s
Actual Value Range: 0~255
Default Value: 10

HOPEN BSC690 SET GBFD-1 Enhance Meaning: An MS cannot be handed over from the
ALTYT 0 GCELL 14402 d Dual- underlaid subcell to the overlaid subcell in this
IME HOED Band duration after the MS is handed over from the overlaid
BPARA Network subcell to the underlaid subcell successfully.
GUI Value Range: 0~255
Unit: s
Actual Value Range: 0~255
Default Value: 5

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 202


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

HOPEN BSC691 SET GBFD-1 Enhance Meaning: An MS cannot be handed over from the
ALTYT 0 GCELL 14402 d Dual- underlaid subcell to the overlaid subcell in this
IME HOED Band duration after the MS is handed over from the overlaid
BPARA Network subcell to the underlaid subcell successfully.
GUI Value Range: 0~255
Unit: s
Actual Value Range: 0~255
Default Value: 5

FAILSI BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Penalty signal level imposed on a target cell
GSTRP 0 GCELL 10601 EI I to which the handover fails due to congestion or poor
UNISH HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov radio quality. This penalty helps to prevent the MS
PEN 10501 er from making a second handover attempt to the target
HUAW cell.
EI II GUI Value Range: 0~63
Handov Unit: dB
er
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 30

FAILSI BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Penalty signal level imposed on a target cell
GSTRP 0 GCELL 10601 EI I to which the handover fails due to congestion or poor
UNISH HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov radio quality. This penalty helps to prevent the MS
PEN 10501 er from making a second handover attempt to the target
HUAW cell.
EI II GUI Value Range: 0~63
Handov Unit: dB
er
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 30

UMPE BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Timer of penalty on a neighboring cell when
NALTY 0 GCELL 10601 EI I a handover fails due to faults of air interface
TIMER HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov connection.
PEN 10501 er GUI Value Range: 0~255
HUAW Unit: s
EI II
Handov Actual Value Range: 0~255
er Default Value: 10

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 203


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

UMPE BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Timer of penalty on a neighboring cell when
NALTY 0 GCELL 10601 EI I a handover fails due to faults of air interface
TIMER HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov connection.
PEN 10501 er GUI Value Range: 0~255
HUAW Unit: s
EI II
Handov Actual Value Range: 0~255
er Default Value: 10

RSCPE BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Timer for punishing the neighboring cells
NALTY 0 GCELL 10601 EI I when handover failures occur due to resource-related
TIMER HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov causes, such as resources being insufficient
PEN 10501 er GUI Value Range: 0~255
HUAW Unit: s
EI II
Handov Actual Value Range: 0~255
er Default Value: 5

RSCPE BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Timer for punishing the neighboring cells
NALTY 0 GCELL 10601 EI I when handover failures occur due to resource-related
TIMER HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov causes, such as resources being insufficient
PEN 10501 er GUI Value Range: 0~255
HUAW Unit: s
EI II
Handov Actual Value Range: 0~255
er Default Value: 5

PENAL BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Timer of penalty on a neighboring cell when
TYTIM 0 GCELL 10601 EI I a handover fails due to faults of data configuration.
ER HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov GUI Value Range: 0~255
PEN 10501 er
Unit: s
HUAW
EI II Actual Value Range: 0~255
Handov Default Value: 255
er

PENAL BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Timer of penalty on a neighboring cell when
TYTIM 0 GCELL 10601 EI I a handover fails due to faults of data configuration.
ER HOFIT GBFD-5 Handov GUI Value Range: 0~255
PEN 10501 er
Unit: s
HUAW
EI II Actual Value Range: 0~255
Handov Default Value: 255
er

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 204


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

TIMEO BSC690 SET GBFD-1 Concent Meaning: After an OL subcell to UL subcell handover
TOUFA 0 GCELL 13201 ric Cell of an MS fails, the MS does not perform OL subell-
ILPUN HOIUO UL subcell handovers within the value of the
parameter.
GUI Value Range: 0~255
Unit: s
Actual Value Range: 0~255
Default Value: 10

TIMEO BSC691 SET GBFD-1 Concent Meaning: After an OL subcell to UL subcell handover
TOUFA 0 GCELL 13201 ric Cell of an MS fails, the MS does not perform OL subell-
ILPUN HOIUO UL subcell handovers within the value of the
parameter.
GUI Value Range: 0~255
Unit: s
Actual Value Range: 0~255
Default Value: 10

TIMEU BSC690 SET GBFD-1 Concent Meaning: After an UL subcell to OL subcell handover
TOOFA 0 GCELL 13201 ric Cell of an MS fails, the MS does not perform UL subcell to
ILPUN HOIUO OL subcell handovers within the value of the
parameter.
GUI Value Range: 10~255
Unit: s
Actual Value Range: 10~255
Default Value: 40

TIMEU BSC691 SET GBFD-1 Concent Meaning: After an UL subcell to OL subcell handover
TOOFA 0 GCELL 13201 ric Cell of an MS fails, the MS does not perform UL subcell to
ILPUN HOIUO OL subcell handovers within the value of the
parameter.
GUI Value Range: 10~255
Unit: s
Actual Value Range: 10~255
Default Value: 40

INRBS BSC690 SET GBFD-1 SDCCH Meaning: Whether to allow inter-BSC SDCCH
CSDHO 0 GCELL 10608 Handov handovers
EN HOCT er GUI Value Range: NO(No), YES(Yes)
RL
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO, YES
Default Value: NO(No)

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 205


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

INRBS BSC691 SET GBFD-1 SDCCH Meaning: Whether to allow inter-BSC SDCCH
CSDHO 0 GCELL 10608 Handov handovers
EN HOCT er GUI Value Range: NO(No), YES(Yes)
RL
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO, YES
Default Value: NO(No)

HOCD BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning:


CMIND 0 GCELL 10601 EI I If the downlink received signal level of a neighbor cell
WPWR HOBAS GBFD-5 Handov is greater than or equal to "Min DL Level on
IC 10501 er Candidate Cell" plus "Min Access Level Offset", the
HUAW neighbor cell can be listed in the candidate cell queue
EI II for handover. The value of this parameter ranges from
Handov 0 to 63, representing -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
er A neighboring cell can be added to the candidate cell
list only when both of the following conditions are
met:
Downlink receive level of the neighboring cell >=
"HOCDCMINDWPWR" + "MINOFFSET", Uplink
receive level of the neighboring cell >=
"HOCDCMINUPPWR" + "MINOFFSET".
GUI Value Range: 0~63
Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 15

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 206


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

HOCD BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning:


CMIND 0 GCELL 10601 EI I If the downlink received signal level of a neighbor cell
WPWR HOBAS GBFD-5 Handov is greater than or equal to "Min DL Level on
IC 10501 er Candidate Cell" plus "Min Access Level Offset", the
HUAW neighbor cell can be listed in the candidate cell queue
EI II for handover. The value of this parameter ranges from
Handov 0 to 63, representing -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
er A neighboring cell can be added to the candidate cell
list only when both of the following conditions are
met:
Downlink receive level of the neighboring cell >=
"HOCDCMINDWPWR" + "MINOFFSET", Uplink
receive level of the neighboring cell >=
"HOCDCMINUPPWR" + "MINOFFSET".
GUI Value Range: 0~63
Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 15

MINOF BSC690 ADD GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Minimum receive level offset. The
FSET 0 G2GNC 10601 EI I following condition must be met for a neighboring
ELL GBFD-5 Handov cell to be added into the candidate cell queue:
MOD 10501 er Neighboring cell uplink level >=
G2GNC HUAW ("HOCDCMINUPPWR" + "MINOFFSET") and
ELL EI II Neighboring cell downlink level >=
Handov ("HOCDCMINDWPWR" + "MINOFFSET").
er GUI Value Range: 0~63
Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 0

MINOF BSC691 ADD GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Minimum receive level offset. The
FSET 0 G2GNC 10601 EI I following condition must be met for a neighboring
ELL GBFD-5 Handov cell to be added into the candidate cell queue:
MOD 10501 er Neighboring cell uplink level >=
G2GNC HUAW ("HOCDCMINUPPWR" + "MINOFFSET") and
ELL EI II Neighboring cell downlink level >=
Handov ("HOCDCMINDWPWR" + "MINOFFSET").
er GUI Value Range: 0~63
Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 0

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 207


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

HOCD BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning:


CMINU 0 GCELL 10601 EI I Limit on the minimum uplink receive level for a
PPWR HOBAS GBFD-5 Handov neighboring cell. You are advised to use the default
IC 10501 er value 0 for this parameter because the receive level for
HUAW a neighboring cell can be limited by Min DL Level on
EI II Candidate Cell. The uplink receive level for a
Handov neighboring cell cannot be obtained from a live
er network. It is estimated using the following formula:
Uplink receive level for a neighboring cell =
Maximum transmit power of an MS - (BTS transmit
power - Downlink receive level for a neighboring
cell).
The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63,
representing -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
A neighboring cell can be added to the candidate cell
list only when both of the following conditions are
met:
Downlink receive level of the neighboring cell >=
"HOCDCMINDWPWR" + "MINOFFSET", Uplink
receive level of the neighboring cell >=
"HOCDCMINUPPWR" + "MINOFFSET".
GUI Value Range: 0~63
Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 0

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 208


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

HOCD BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning:


CMINU 0 GCELL 10601 EI I Limit on the minimum uplink receive level for a
PPWR HOBAS GBFD-5 Handov neighboring cell. You are advised to use the default
IC 10501 er value 0 for this parameter because the receive level for
HUAW a neighboring cell can be limited by Min DL Level on
EI II Candidate Cell. The uplink receive level for a
Handov neighboring cell cannot be obtained from a live
er network. It is estimated using the following formula:
Uplink receive level for a neighboring cell =
Maximum transmit power of an MS - (BTS transmit
power - Downlink receive level for a neighboring
cell).
The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63,
representing -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
A neighboring cell can be added to the candidate cell
list only when both of the following conditions are
met:
Downlink receive level of the neighboring cell >=
"HOCDCMINDWPWR" + "MINOFFSET", Uplink
receive level of the neighboring cell >=
"HOCDCMINUPPWR" + "MINOFFSET".
GUI Value Range: 0~63
Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 0

FDDRE BSC690 SET GBFD-1 GSM/ Meaning: This parameter specifies whether Ec/No or
P 0 GCELL 14301 WCDM RSCP is used for the measurement report on an FDD
CCUTR A cell. Ec/No stands for the signal-to-noise ratio. RSCP
ANSYS Interope stands for the received signal code power.
rability GUI Value Range: RSCP(RSCP), EcNo(Ec/No)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: RSCP, EcNo
Default Value: EcNo(Ec/No)

FDDRE BSC691 SET GBFD-1 GSM/ Meaning: This parameter specifies whether Ec/No or
P 0 GCELL 14301 WCDM RSCP is used for the measurement report on an FDD
CCUTR A cell. Ec/No stands for the signal-to-noise ratio. RSCP
ANSYS Interope stands for the received signal code power.
rability GUI Value Range: RSCP(RSCP), EcNo(Ec/No)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: RSCP, EcNo
Default Value: EcNo(Ec/No)

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 209


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

MINEC BSC690 ADD GBFD-1 GSM/ Meaning:


NOTH 0 GEXT3 14301 WCDM Minimum level threshold for triggering a handover to
RES GCELL A a 3G candidate cell. If the measured level of a 3G
MOD Interope neighboring cell is lower than this threshold, the 3G
GEXT3 rability neighboring cell will be removed from all 3G
GCELL candidate cells.
The decibel value corresponding to the parameter
values are as follows: (For details, see the 3GPP TS
45.008 protocol.):
0: < -24 dB
1: -24 dB <= CPICH Ec/Io < -23.5 dB
2: -23.5 dB <= CPICH Ec/Io < -23 dB
...
47: -1 dB <= CPICH Ec/Io < -0.5 dB
48: -0.5 dB <= CPICH Ec/Io < 0 dB
49: 0 dB <= CPICH Ec/Io.
GUI Value Range: 0~49
Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~49
Default Value: 25

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 210


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

MINEC BSC691 ADD GBFD-1 GSM/ Meaning:


NOTH 0 GEXT3 14301 WCDM Minimum level threshold for triggering a handover to
RES GCELL A a 3G candidate cell. If the measured level of a 3G
MOD Interope neighboring cell is lower than this threshold, the 3G
GEXT3 rability neighboring cell will be removed from all 3G
GCELL candidate cells.
The decibel value corresponding to the parameter
values are as follows: (For details, see the 3GPP TS
45.008 protocol.):
0: < -24 dB
1: -24 dB <= CPICH Ec/Io < -23.5 dB
2: -23.5 dB <= CPICH Ec/Io < -23 dB
...
47: -1 dB <= CPICH Ec/Io < -0.5 dB
48: -0.5 dB <= CPICH Ec/Io < 0 dB
49: 0 dB <= CPICH Ec/Io.
GUI Value Range: 0~49
Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~49
Default Value: 25

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 211


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

MINRS BSC690 ADD GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning:


CPTHR 0 GEXT3 10601 EI I Minimum level threshold for triggering a handover to
ES GCELL GBFD-1 Handov a 3G candidate cell. If the measured level of a 3G
MOD 14301 er neighboring cell is lower than this threshold, the 3G
GEXT3 GBFD-1 GSM/ neighboring cell will be removed from all 3G
GCELL 14302 WCDM candidate cells.
A The decibel value corresponding to the parameter
GBFD-5 Interope
10501 values are as follows: (For details, see the 3GPP TS
rability 45.008 protocol.):
GSM/T 0: CPICH RSCP < -115 dBm
D-
SCDMA 1: -115 dBm <= CPICH RSCP < -114 dBm
Interope 2: -114 dBm <= CPICH RSCP < -113 dBm
rability ...
HUAW 61: -55 dBm <= CPICH RSCP < -54 dBm
EI II
Handov 62: -54 dBm <= CPICH RSCP < -53 dBm
er 63: -53 dBm <= CPICH RSCP.
GUI Value Range: 0~63
Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 20

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 212


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

MINRS BSC691 ADD GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning:


CPTHR 0 GEXT3 10601 EI I Minimum level threshold for triggering a handover to
ES GCELL GBFD-1 Handov a 3G candidate cell. If the measured level of a 3G
MOD 14301 er neighboring cell is lower than this threshold, the 3G
GEXT3 GBFD-1 GSM/ neighboring cell will be removed from all 3G
GCELL 14302 WCDM candidate cells.
A The decibel value corresponding to the parameter
GBFD-5 Interope
10501 values are as follows: (For details, see the 3GPP TS
rability 45.008 protocol.):
GSM/T 0: CPICH RSCP < -115 dBm
D-
SCDMA 1: -115 dBm <= CPICH RSCP < -114 dBm
Interope 2: -114 dBm <= CPICH RSCP < -113 dBm
rability ...
HUAW 61: -55 dBm <= CPICH RSCP < -54 dBm
EI II
Handov 62: -54 dBm <= CPICH RSCP < -53 dBm
er 63: -53 dBm <= CPICH RSCP.
GUI Value Range: 0~63
Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 20

HOPRI BSC690 SET GBFD-5 HUAW Meaning: Whether to adjust handover priority in
OMOD 0 GCELL 10501 EI II handover algorithm II. If this parameter is set to
EN HOBAS Handov YES(Yes), an edge handover using handover
IC er algorithm II is not an emergency handover, cell level,
priority, and load are considered in an emergency
handover, and a better cell handover takes precedence
over an emergency handover. If this parameter is set to
NO(No), the handover priority in handover algorithm
II is not adjusted.
GUI Value Range: NO(No), YES(Yes)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO, YES
Default Value: NO(No)

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 213


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

HOPRI BSC691 SET GBFD-5 HUAW Meaning: Whether to adjust handover priority in
OMOD 0 GCELL 10501 EI II handover algorithm II. If this parameter is set to
EN HOBAS Handov YES(Yes), an edge handover using handover
IC er algorithm II is not an emergency handover, cell level,
priority, and load are considered in an emergency
handover, and a better cell handover takes precedence
over an emergency handover. If this parameter is set to
NO(No), the handover priority in handover algorithm
II is not adjusted.
GUI Value Range: NO(No), YES(Yes)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO, YES
Default Value: NO(No)

DIREC BSC690 SET GBFD-1 Direct Meaning: Whether to enable a directed retry. The
TRYEN 0 GCELL 10607 Retry directed retry is to hand over an MS to a neighboring
BASIC cell in the same procedure as the handover. The
PARA directed retry is an emergency measure applicable to
abnormal traffic peaks in some areas of a radio
network. You should not use the directed retry as a
major means of solving traffic congestion. If the
directed retry always occurs in some areas of a
network, consider adjusting the sector and TRX
configuration and the network layout.
GUI Value Range: NO(No), YES(Yes)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO, YES
Default Value: YES(Yes)

DIREC BSC691 SET GBFD-1 Direct Meaning: Whether to enable a directed retry. The
TRYEN 0 GCELL 10607 Retry directed retry is to hand over an MS to a neighboring
BASIC cell in the same procedure as the handover. The
PARA directed retry is an emergency measure applicable to
abnormal traffic peaks in some areas of a radio
network. You should not use the directed retry as a
major means of solving traffic congestion. If the
directed retry always occurs in some areas of a
network, consider adjusting the sector and TRX
configuration and the network layout.
GUI Value Range: NO(No), YES(Yes)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO, YES
Default Value: YES(Yes)

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 214


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

ASSLO BSC690 SET GBFD-1 Direct Meaning:


ADJUD 0 GCELL 10607 Retry Whether to enable the directed retry based on cell
GEEN CCBAS load. Directed retry is enabled if the following
IC conditions are met:
This parameter is set to ENABLE.
The cell supports directed retry.
The current cell load is larger than or equal to the
value of "CDRTTRYFBDTHRES" in "SET
GCELLOTHEXT" during assignment. If this
parameter is set to DISABLE, the MS attempts to
apply for a channel in the serving cell. If the
application fails, it continues with the directed retry
procedure.
GUI Value Range: DISABLE(Disable),
ENABLE(Enable)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: DISABLE, ENABLE
Default Value: DISABLE(Disable)

ASSLO BSC691 SET GBFD-1 Direct Meaning:


ADJUD 0 GCELL 10607 Retry Whether to enable the directed retry based on cell
GEEN CCBAS load. Directed retry is enabled if the following
IC conditions are met:
This parameter is set to ENABLE.
The cell supports directed retry.
The current cell load is larger than or equal to the
value of "CDRTTRYFBDTHRES" in "SET
GCELLOTHEXT" during assignment. If this
parameter is set to DISABLE, the MS attempts to
apply for a channel in the serving cell. If the
application fails, it continues with the directed retry
procedure.
GUI Value Range: DISABLE(Disable),
ENABLE(Enable)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: DISABLE, ENABLE
Default Value: DISABLE(Disable)

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 215


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

DTLOA BSC690 SET GBFD-1 Direct Meaning: Threshold of the load in the target cell for
DTHRE 0 GCELL 10607 Retry the directed retry. Only a cell whose load is lower than
D CCBAS or equal to this threshold can be selected as a
IC candidate target cell.
GUI Value Range: 0~100
Unit: %
Actual Value Range: 0~100
Default Value: 85

DTLOA BSC691 SET GBFD-1 Direct Meaning: Threshold of the load in the target cell for
DTHRE 0 GCELL 10607 Retry the directed retry. Only a cell whose load is lower than
D CCBAS or equal to this threshold can be selected as a
IC candidate target cell.
GUI Value Range: 0~100
Unit: %
Actual Value Range: 0~100
Default Value: 85

DRHO BSC690 ADD GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Difference between the downlink receive
LEVRA 0 G2GNC 10601 EI I level of the serving cell and that of a neighboring cell
NGE ELL GBFD-5 Handov during handovers due to directed retry. In the case of
MOD 10501 er Huawei handover algorithm II, this parameter is used
G2GNC HUAW to calculate the hysteresis of handovers due to directed
ELL EI II retry using the following formula: Hysteresis of
Handov handovers due to directed retry = Value of
er "INTERCELLHYST" - Value of this parameter.
Handovers due to directed retry to a neighboring cell
can be triggered when the following condition is met:
(Downlink receive level of the neighboring cell after
filtering - Downlink receive level of the serving cell
after power control compensation) > (Value of
"INTERCELLHYST" - 64) - (Value of this parameter
- 64).
GUI Value Range: 0~128
Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~128
Default Value: 72

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 216


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

DRHO BSC691 ADD GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Difference between the downlink receive
LEVRA 0 G2GNC 10601 EI I level of the serving cell and that of a neighboring cell
NGE ELL GBFD-5 Handov during handovers due to directed retry. In the case of
MOD 10501 er Huawei handover algorithm II, this parameter is used
G2GNC HUAW to calculate the hysteresis of handovers due to directed
ELL EI II retry using the following formula: Hysteresis of
Handov handovers due to directed retry = Value of
er "INTERCELLHYST" - Value of this parameter.
Handovers due to directed retry to a neighboring cell
can be triggered when the following condition is met:
(Downlink receive level of the neighboring cell after
filtering - Downlink receive level of the serving cell
after power control compensation) > (Value of
"INTERCELLHYST" - 64) - (Value of this parameter
- 64).
GUI Value Range: 0~128
Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~128
Default Value: 72

MINP BSC690 SET GBFD-1 Direct Meaning: Level threshold for a candidate cell in a
WRLE 0 GCELL 10607 Retry directed retry where handover algorithm I is used. If
VDIRT HOCT the receive level for a neighboring cell is higher than
RY RL or equal to the value of this parameter, the
neighboring cell can be selected as a candidate cell for
the directed retry. This parameter is invalid in
handover algorithm II.
GUI Value Range: 0~63
Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 16

MINP BSC691 SET GBFD-1 Direct Meaning: Level threshold for a candidate cell in a
WRLE 0 GCELL 10607 Retry directed retry where handover algorithm I is used. If
VDIRT HOCT the receive level for a neighboring cell is higher than
RY RL or equal to the value of this parameter, the
neighboring cell can be selected as a candidate cell for
the directed retry. This parameter is invalid in
handover algorithm II.
GUI Value Range: 0~63
Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 16

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 217


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

DRTAG BSC690 SET GBFD-1 Direct Meaning: Whether directed retry can be performed to
CELLS 0 GCELL 10607 Retry multiple target cells. When this parameter is set to
EL OTHE "YES", directed retry can be performed to multiple
XT target cells. When this parameter is set to "NO",
directed retry can be performed to only one target cell.
GUI Value Range: NO(No), YES(Yes)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO, YES
Default Value: NO(No)

DRTAG BSC691 SET GBFD-1 Direct Meaning: Whether directed retry can be performed to
CELLS 0 GCELL 10607 Retry multiple target cells. When this parameter is set to
EL OTHE "YES", directed retry can be performed to multiple
XT target cells. When this parameter is set to "NO",
directed retry can be performed to only one target cell.
GUI Value Range: NO(No), YES(Yes)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO, YES
Default Value: NO(No)

HOTR BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Maximum number of handover attempts
YCNT 0 GCELL 10601 EI I that can be triggered. When there is more than one
HOAD Handov candidate cell, the BSC attempts to hand over the MS
er to the second candidate cell if congestion occurs in the
first candidate cell to ensure handover success and call
continuity. If congestion also occurs in the second
candidate cell, the BSC attempts to hand over the MS
to the third candidate cell.
GUI Value Range: 1~3
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 1~3
Default Value: 3

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 218


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

HOTR BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Maximum number of handover attempts
YCNT 0 GCELL 10601 EI I that can be triggered. When there is more than one
HOAD Handov candidate cell, the BSC attempts to hand over the MS
er to the second candidate cell if congestion occurs in the
first candidate cell to ensure handover success and call
continuity. If congestion also occurs in the second
candidate cell, the BSC attempts to hand over the MS
to the third candidate cell.
GUI Value Range: 1~3
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 1~3
Default Value: 3

HOOP BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: This parameter specifies whether a 2G cell
TSEL 0 GCELL 10601 EI I or to a 3G cell is preferentially selected as the target
HOUT GBFD-1 Handov cell for handover. When this parameter is set to
RANFD 14301 er Pre_2G_Cell, the BSC preferentially selects a 2G
D GSM/ candidate cell as the target cell for handover. When
GBFD-1 this parameter is set to Pre_3G_Cell, the BSC
14302 WCDM
A preferentially selects a 3G candidate cell as the target
GBFD-5 Interope cell for handover. When this parameter is set to
10501 rability Pre_2G_CellThres, the BSC preferentially selects a
neighboring 3G cell as the handover target cell if the
GSM/T receive level of the neighboring 2G cell that ranks the
D- first in the candidate cell list is equal to or smaller
SCDMA than "HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell".
Interope Otherwise, the BSC preferentially selects a
rability neighboring 2G cell as the handover target cell.
HUAW GUI Value Range: Pre_2G_Cell(Preference for 2G
EI II cell), Pre_3G_Cell(Preference for 3G cell),
Handov Pre_2G_CellThres(Preference 2G cell by thresh)
er
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: Pre_2G_Cell, Pre_3G_Cell,
Pre_2G_CellThres
Default Value: Pre_2G_CellThres(Preference 2G cell
by thresh)

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 219


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

HOOP BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: This parameter specifies whether a 2G cell
TSEL 0 GCELL 10601 EI I or to a 3G cell is preferentially selected as the target
HOUT GBFD-1 Handov cell for handover. When this parameter is set to
RANFD 14301 er Pre_2G_Cell, the BSC preferentially selects a 2G
D GSM/ candidate cell as the target cell for handover. When
GBFD-1 this parameter is set to Pre_3G_Cell, the BSC
14302 WCDM
A preferentially selects a 3G candidate cell as the target
GBFD-5 Interope cell for handover. When this parameter is set to
10501 rability Pre_2G_CellThres, the BSC preferentially selects a
neighboring 3G cell as the handover target cell if the
GSM/T receive level of the neighboring 2G cell that ranks the
D- first in the candidate cell list is equal to or smaller
SCDMA than "HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell".
Interope Otherwise, the BSC preferentially selects a
rability neighboring 2G cell as the handover target cell.
HUAW GUI Value Range: Pre_2G_Cell(Preference for 2G
EI II cell), Pre_3G_Cell(Preference for 3G cell),
Handov Pre_2G_CellThres(Preference 2G cell by thresh)
er
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: Pre_2G_Cell, Pre_3G_Cell,
Pre_2G_CellThres
Default Value: Pre_2G_CellThres(Preference 2G cell
by thresh)

HOPRE BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: If the receive level of the neighboring 2G
TH2G 0 GCELL 10601 EI I cell that ranks the first in the candidate cell list is
HOUT GBFD-1 Handov equal to or smaller than this threshold, the BSC
RANFD 14301 er preferentially selects a neighboring 3G cell as the
D GSM/ handover target cell. Otherwise, the BSC
GBFD-1 preferentially selects a neighboring 2G cell as the
14302 WCDM
A handover target cell.
GBFD-5 Interope GUI Value Range: 0~63
10501 rability Unit: dB
GSM/T Actual Value Range: 0~63
D-
SCDMA Default Value: 25
Interope
rability
HUAW
EI II
Handov
er

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 220


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

HOPRE BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: If the receive level of the neighboring 2G
TH2G 0 GCELL 10601 EI I cell that ranks the first in the candidate cell list is
HOUT GBFD-1 Handov equal to or smaller than this threshold, the BSC
RANFD 14301 er preferentially selects a neighboring 3G cell as the
D GSM/ handover target cell. Otherwise, the BSC
GBFD-1 preferentially selects a neighboring 2G cell as the
14302 WCDM
A handover target cell.
GBFD-5 Interope GUI Value Range: 0~63
10501 rability Unit: dB
GSM/T Actual Value Range: 0~63
D-
SCDMA Default Value: 25
Interope
rability
HUAW
EI II
Handov
er

NEWU BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Minimum interval between two consecutive
RGHO 0 GCELL 10601 EI I emergency handovers performed by an MS. During
MININ HOCT GBFD-5 Handov this interval, no emergency handover is allowed.
TV RL 10501 er GUI Value Range: 0~60
HUAW Unit: s
EI II
Handov Actual Value Range: 0~60
er Default Value: 4

NEWU BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning: Minimum interval between two consecutive
RGHO 0 GCELL 10601 EI I emergency handovers performed by an MS. During
MININ HOCT GBFD-5 Handov this interval, no emergency handover is allowed.
TV RL 10501 er GUI Value Range: 0~60
HUAW Unit: s
EI II
Handov Actual Value Range: 0~60
er Default Value: 4

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 221


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

SCELL BSC690 SET GBFD-5 Fast Meaning: When the network receives measurement
FILTE 0 GCELL 10102 Move reports, in consideration of the accuracy of a single
R HOFAS Handov measurement report, the measurement values in
T er certain measurement reports are filtered to represent
the radio operating environment. The parameter
specifies the number of measurement reports used for
filtering measurement information of the serving cell.
GUI Value Range: 1~20
Unit: 470ms; 480ms
Actual Value Range: 480~9600(TCH);
470~9400(SDCCH)
Default Value: 4

SCELL BSC691 SET GBFD-5 Fast Meaning: When the network receives measurement
FILTE 0 GCELL 10102 Move reports, in consideration of the accuracy of a single
R HOFAS Handov measurement report, the measurement values in
T er certain measurement reports are filtered to represent
the radio operating environment. The parameter
specifies the number of measurement reports used for
filtering measurement information of the serving cell.
GUI Value Range: 1~20
Unit: 470ms; 480ms
Actual Value Range: 480~9600(TCH);
470~9400(SDCCH)
Default Value: 4

NCELL BSC690 SET GBFD-5 Fast Meaning: For the purpose of accurately reflecting the
FILTE 0 GCELL 10102 Move radio environment of a network, filtering is performed
R HOFAS Handov on the measured values in several consecutive
T er measurement reports. This parameter indicates the
number of measurement reports used for the filtering
of neighboring cell information.
GUI Value Range: 1~20
Unit: 470ms; 480ms
Actual Value Range: 480~9600(TCH);
470~9400(SDCCH)
Default Value: 4

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 222


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

NCELL BSC691 SET GBFD-5 Fast Meaning: For the purpose of accurately reflecting the
FILTE 0 GCELL 10102 Move radio environment of a network, filtering is performed
R HOFAS Handov on the measured values in several consecutive
T er measurement reports. This parameter indicates the
number of measurement reports used for the filtering
of neighboring cell information.
GUI Value Range: 1~20
Unit: 470ms; 480ms
Actual Value Range: 480~9600(TCH);
470~9400(SDCCH)
Default Value: 4

IGNOR BSC690 SET GBFD-5 Fast Meaning: Number of invalid measurement reports
EMRN 0 GCELL 10102 Move allowed when the BSC filters the measurement
UM HOFAS Handov reports. When the number of received measurement
T er reports is no larger than this parameter, the BSC does
not perform filtering or make quick handover
judgment.
GUI Value Range: 0~32
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~32
Default Value: 1

IGNOR BSC691 SET GBFD-5 Fast Meaning: Number of invalid measurement reports
EMRN 0 GCELL 10102 Move allowed when the BSC filters the measurement
UM HOFAS Handov reports. When the number of received measurement
T er reports is no larger than this parameter, the BSC does
not perform filtering or make quick handover
judgment.
GUI Value Range: 0~32
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~32
Default Value: 1

QUICK BSC690 SET GBFD-5 Fast Meaning: Whether to allow the fast handover
HOEN 0 GCELL 10102 Move algorithm
HOBAS Handov GUI Value Range: NO(No), YES(Yes)
IC er
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO, YES
Default Value: NO(No)

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 223


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

QUICK BSC691 SET GBFD-5 Fast Meaning: Whether to allow the fast handover
HOEN 0 GCELL 10102 Move algorithm
HOBAS Handov GUI Value Range: NO(No), YES(Yes)
IC er
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO, YES
Default Value: NO(No)

MOVE BSC690 SET GBFD-5 Fast Meaning: A quick handover can be initiated only if
SPEED 0 GCELL 10102 Move the rate of an MS is higher than this parameter during
THRES HOFAS Handov a period of time.
T er GUI Value Range: 0~600
Unit: m/s
Actual Value Range: 0~600
Default Value: 35

MOVE BSC691 SET GBFD-5 Fast Meaning: A quick handover can be initiated only if
SPEED 0 GCELL 10102 Move the rate of an MS is higher than this parameter during
THRES HOFAS Handov a period of time.
T er GUI Value Range: 0~600
Unit: m/s
Actual Value Range: 0~600
Default Value: 35

HOUPT BSC690 SET GBFD-5 Fast Meaning: Threshold for the uplink receive level
RIGE 0 GCELL 10102 Move during fast handovers. Fast handovers are triggered
HOFAS Handov when the uplink receive level in the serving cell is
T er lower than this threshold.
GUI Value Range: 0~63
Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 50

HOUPT BSC691 SET GBFD-5 Fast Meaning: Threshold for the uplink receive level
RIGE 0 GCELL 10102 Move during fast handovers. Fast handovers are triggered
HOFAS Handov when the uplink receive level in the serving cell is
T er lower than this threshold.
GUI Value Range: 0~63
Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 50

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 224


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

HODO BSC690 SET GBFD-5 Fast Meaning: Threshold for the downlink receive level
WNTRI 0 GCELL 10102 Move during fast handovers. Fast handovers may be
GE HOFAS Handov triggered when the downlink receive level in the
T er serving cell is lower than this threshold.
GUI Value Range: 0~63
Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 50

HODO BSC691 SET GBFD-5 Fast Meaning: Threshold for the downlink receive level
WNTRI 0 GCELL 10102 Move during fast handovers. Fast handovers may be
GE HOFAS Handov triggered when the downlink receive level in the
T er serving cell is lower than this threshold.
GUI Value Range: 0~63
Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~63
Default Value: 50

HOOFF BSC690 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning:


SET 0 GCELL 10601 EI I This parameter is used for quick handover decisions.
HOFAS GBFD-5 Handov Quick handover can be triggered only when the
T 10501 er following condition is met:
HUAW Path loss in the serving cell - Path loss in chain
EI II neighboring cell > The quick handover trigger
Handov threshold
er
The quick handover trigger threshold is the sum of
"HOOFFSET" in "SET GCELLHOFAST" in the case
of internal neighboring cells or in "MOD
GEXT2GCELL" in the case of external neighboring
cells and "ADJHOOFFSET" configured by the
neighboring cell. The actual value of this parameter is
equal to the GUI value minus 64.
GUI Value Range: 0~127
Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: -64~63
Default Value: 68

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 225


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

HOOFF BSC691 SET GBFD-1 HUAW Meaning:


SET 0 GCELL 10601 EI I This parameter is used for quick handover decisions.
HOFAS GBFD-5 Handov Quick handover can be triggered only when the
T 10501 er following condition is met:
HUAW Path loss in the serving cell - Path loss in chain
EI II neighboring cell > The quick handover trigger
Handov threshold
er
The quick handover trigger threshold is the sum of
"HOOFFSET" in "SET GCELLHOFAST" in the case
of internal neighboring cells or in "MOD
GEXT2GCELL" in the case of external neighboring
cells and "ADJHOOFFSET" configured by the
neighboring cell. The actual value of this parameter is
equal to the GUI value minus 64.
GUI Value Range: 0~127
Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: -64~63
Default Value: 68

ADJHO BSC690 ADD GBFD-5 Fast Meaning:


OFFSE 0 G2GNC 10102 Move This parameter is used as the offset for "HOOFFSET"
T ELL Handov (for "SET GCELLHOFAST" in the case of internal
MOD er neighboring cells or for "MOD GEXT2GCELL" in
G2GNC the case of external neighboring cells)during handover
ELL decision. Quick handover can be triggered only when
the following condition is met:
Path loss in the serving cell - Path loss in chain
neighboring cell > The quick handover trigger
threshold
The quick handover trigger threshold is the sum of
"HOOFFSET"(for "SET GCELLHOFAST" in the
case of internal neighboring cells or for "MOD
GEXT2GCELL" in the case of external neighboring
cells) and "ADJHOOFFSET" configured by the
neighboring cell.
GUI Value Range: 0~127
Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~127
Default Value: 0

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 226


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

ADJHO BSC691 ADD GBFD-5 Fast Meaning:


OFFSE 0 G2GNC 10102 Move This parameter is used as the offset for "HOOFFSET"
T ELL Handov (for "SET GCELLHOFAST" in the case of internal
MOD er neighboring cells or for "MOD GEXT2GCELL" in
G2GNC the case of external neighboring cells)during handover
ELL decision. Quick handover can be triggered only when
the following condition is met:
Path loss in the serving cell - Path loss in chain
neighboring cell > The quick handover trigger
threshold
The quick handover trigger threshold is the sum of
"HOOFFSET"(for "SET GCELLHOFAST" in the
case of internal neighboring cells or for "MOD
GEXT2GCELL" in the case of external neighboring
cells) and "ADJHOOFFSET" configured by the
neighboring cell.
GUI Value Range: 0~127
Unit: dB
Actual Value Range: 0~127
Default Value: 0

AFCH BSC690 SET GBFD-5 Fast Meaning: The P/N rule must be met for triggering a
OSTAT 0 GCELL 10102 Move frequency shift handover. That is, a frequency shift
TIME HOFAS Handov handover can be triggered when P measurement
T er reports in N measurement reports meet the handover
decision conditions. This parameter corresponds to N
of the P/N rule.
GUI Value Range: 1~32
Unit: 0.5s
Actual Value Range: 0.5~16
Default Value: 4

AFCH BSC691 SET GBFD-5 Fast Meaning: The P/N rule must be met for triggering a
OSTAT 0 GCELL 10102 Move frequency shift handover. That is, a frequency shift
TIME HOFAS Handov handover can be triggered when P measurement
T er reports in N measurement reports meet the handover
decision conditions. This parameter corresponds to N
of the P/N rule.
GUI Value Range: 1~32
Unit: 0.5s
Actual Value Range: 0.5~16
Default Value: 4

Issue 01 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 227


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GSM BSS
Handover Feature Parameter Description 7 Parameters

Parame NE MML Feature Feature Description


ter ID Comma ID Name
nd

AFCH BSC690 SET GBFD-5 Fast Meaning: The P/N rule must be met for triggering a
OLAST 0 GCELL 10102 Move frequency shift handover. That is, a frequency shift
TIME HOFAS Handov handover can be triggered when P measurement
T er reports in N measurement reports meet the handover
decision conditions. This parameter corresponds to P
of the P/N rule.
GUI Value Range: 1~32
Unit: 0.5s
Actual Value Range: 0.5~16
Default Value: 3

AFCH BSC691 SET GBFD-5 Fast Meaning: The P/N rule must be met for triggering a
OLAST 0 GCELL 10102 Move frequency shift handover. That is, a frequency shift
TIME HOFAS Handov handover can be triggered when P measurement
T er reports in N measurement reports meet the handover
decision conditions. This parameter corresponds to P
of the P/N rule.
GUI Value Range: 1~32
Unit: 0.5s
Actual Value Range: 0.5~16
Default Value: 3

QUICK BSC690 SET GBFD-5 Fast Meaning: If this parameter is set to YES, quick PBGT
PBGTH 0 GCELL 10102 Move handover can be initiated when the trigger conditions
OEN HOBAS Handov for the quick PBGT handover are met during
IC er handover decision.
GUI Value Range: NO(No), YES(Yes)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO, YES
Default Value: YES(Yes)

QUICK BSC691 SET GBFD-5 Fast Meaning: If this parameter is set to YES, quick PBGT
PBGTH 0 GCELL 10102 Move handover can be initiated when the trigger conditions
OEN HOBAS Handov for the quick PBGT handover are met during
IC er handover decision.